Home

Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center

1. 7 10 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance 50 000 Miles 83 000 km hange automatic transmission fluid and if the vehicle is mainly driven under ACTUAL e more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches ooo Ee 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter at 100 000 miles 166 000 km Change transfer case fluid 52 500 Miles 87 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant ACTUAL SERVICED BY ERVICED BY velocity joints and axle seals for leaking MILEAGE SERVIC Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper Er ae rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 11 Scheduled Maintenance 60 000 Miles 100 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Inspect engi
2. The shoulder belt is too loose It won t give nearly as much protection this way 1 16 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you The belt is buckled in the wrong place 1 17 Q What s wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 18 You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which aren t as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it 3 A i as D SGIAN i J The belt is twisted across the body 1 19 Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all o
3. 6 60 Fuse Usage o 02 03 toute RT DOORS LT DOORS 04 Tecs 01 Right Door Control Module orros emasu A mez 02 Left Door Control Module 08 S gt 10 DDM SEATS Cave 12 Pon 03 LGM 2 EE E o Map 18 AER J17 RR Park 05 Rear Fog Lamps S nro 06 LGM DSM ison 07 TBC 2 23 gt lt 24 aS 08 Power Seats aX ey 09 Blank 10 DDM go 11 AMP 30 Tec acc 32 Tacs ia PDN f S 13 Rear Climate Controls 36 hvac e 7 F Pank 38 Lr Tum O Tec 14 Left Rear Parking Lamps 41 han taeane pr um wa 15 Auxiliary Power 2 45 LT 47 48 49 cae oe eo CS 16 VEH CHMSL 59 TBc 1G 51 Brake 52 TBC RUN 17 Right Rear Parking Lamps 18 LOCK 6 61 Fuse 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 6 62 Usage Blank Sunroof LOCKS Blank UNLOCK Blank Blank OH Battery OnStar System Rainsense Wipers Parking Lamps TBC 4CC TBC 5 Front Wipers VEH STOP Blank HVAC B Fuse 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Usage Front Parking Lamps Left Turn Signal HVAC 1 TBC 4 Radio TR PARK Right Turn Signal HVAC Rear Fog Lamps Auxiliary Power 1 Ignition 0 All Wheel Drive Blank TBC IG Brakes TBC RUN Replacement Bulbs Lamps Number Tail and Stoplamps 0 3057 Rear Turn Signal Lamps 3057 For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer Capacities and Specifica
4. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue 4 30 Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Don t drink and drive Since you can t see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead In remote areas watch for animals If you re tired pull off the road in a safe place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you re driving don t wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a second or two or even several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who doesn t lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid st
5. Ae Temperature Press the up arrow to increase the temperature of the air flowing through the system and the down arrow to decrease the temperature of the air flowing through the system 3 10 Audio Systems Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls to be sure you re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it Setting the Clock Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears The letters AM or PM may appear on the display for AM or PM Then press and hold MN until the correct minute appears The clock may be set with the ignition on or off In addition the clock can also be automatically set when tuned to an RDS station that is broadcasting time by pressing and holding the HR and the MN button at the same time The display will show TIME UPDATED If there is no time available NO UPDATE will be displayed AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS Standard radio Bose not shown Playing the Radio VOLUME POWER Press this control to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the control clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume SCV Your system has a feature called Speed Compensated Vo
6. Don t let it get twisted Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt isn t long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt JN e ES S O Sn oA gt a S EN x Fd ne vo A a AZ J IFRS The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And yov d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor 1 15 Q What s wrong with this You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body OOF E P A al F A SQ
7. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts refer to Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes later in this section or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink 2 61 Training a Garage Door Opener with a Rolling Code Feature If Equipped If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to HomeLink see Programming the HomeLink Transmitter listed previously If you have completed this programming already you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize HomeLink 1 Find the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand If you have difficulty finding the Learn or Smart button refer to your garage door opener owner s manual or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist in programming the transmitter 2 62 2 Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener motor head unit An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode Following this step you have 30 seconds to start Step 3 3 Return
8. When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is not operational If the alarm does not sound when it should but the headlamps flash check to see if the horn works The horn fuse may be blown To replace the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not flash the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer Passlock Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft deterrent system Passlock is a passive theft deterrent system Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with fuel is disabled and the vehicle will not start During normal operation the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to RUN If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts If the engine does not start after three tries the vehicle needs service If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes on you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off However your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time You may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Brea
9. s Certification Tire label See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits are driven off road in the recommended manner See Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads in the Index use the recommended fuel See Fuel in the Index Scheduled Maintenance The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles 166 000 km should be performed after 100 000 miles 166 000 km at the same intervals The services shown at 150 000 miles 240 000 km should be performed at the same interval after 150 000 miles 240 000 km See Owner Checks and Services and Periodic Maintenance Inspections following Footnotes The U S Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle s useful life We however urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation See Brake System Inspection under Periodic Maintenance Inspections in Part C of this schedule 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance Engine Oil Scheduled Maintenance Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM Oil Life System or every 12 months whichever o
10. If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you d use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 18 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your hazard warning flashers Changing a tire can cause an injury The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people You and they could be badly injured Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine 4 Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle at the opposite end SS i The following steps will tell
11. and another side impact air bag for the right front passenger Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations 1 21 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don t replace them Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle CAUTION Continued 1 22 hits something They aren t designed to inflate at all in rollover rear side or low speed frontal crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past The side impact air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle They aren t designed to inflate in frontal in rollover or in rear crashes Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there
12. changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly That s the reason for this part In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you ll be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg or less You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer don t drive over 50 mph 80 km h and don t make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads You should use THIRD 3 or as you need to a lower gear when towing a trailer Operating your vehicle in THIRD 3
13. deform such as a parked car the threshold level will be higher The driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers side impacts or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts because inflation would not help the occupant A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal air bags inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts For side impact air bags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions including off road usage Observe safe driving speeds especially on rough terrain As always wear your safety belt See Off Road Driving in the Index for more tips on off road driving What makes an air bag inflate
14. drive across it Find another route instead 4 26 Q What if I m driving across an incline that s not too steep but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill What should I do A If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways turn downhill This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping However a much better way to prevent this is to get out and walk the course so you know what the surface is like before you drive it Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you re crossing an incline be sure you and your passengers get out on the uphill side even if the door there is harder to open If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over you ll be right in its path If you have to walk down the slope stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over Getting out on the downhill low side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous If the vehicle rolls over you could be crushed or killed Always get out on the uphill high side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path 4 27 Driving in Mud Sand Snow or Ice When you drive in mud snow or sand your wheels won t get good traction You can t accelerate as quickly turning is more difficult and you ll need longer braking distances It s best to use a low gear when you re in mud the deeper the mud the lower the
15. exposed to a corrosive environment 7 17 Starter Switch Check When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts Try to start the engine in each gear The starter should work only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the starter works in any other position your vehicle needs service 7 18 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check 1 When you are doing this check the vehicle could move suddenly If it does you or others could be injured Follow the steps below Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake in the Index if necessary Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move With the engine off turn the key to the RUN position but don t start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P your vehicle needs service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the par
16. hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they wouldn t work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Don t swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action 4 39 Winter Driving 4 40 Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for winter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a s
17. name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming P TYPE This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY selections PTY and the light next to the button will turn on The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the TUNE RCL P TYPE control to select the PTY you want to listen to Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to find radio stations for the PTY you want to listen to The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes If a station with the selected PTY is not found NONE FOUND will appear on the display If both P TYPE and TRAF are on the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY To use the P TYPE interrupt feature press and hold the P TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt on When you are listening to a compact disc the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected program type format is broadcast AM FM The AM FM button operates the alternate frequency feature Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations Setting PTY Preset St
18. of the air coming through the system on the driver s side Turn the knob counterclockwise to lower the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature decreasing as you turn the knob counterclockwise Turn the knob clockwise to increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature increasing as you turn the knob clockwise When this knob is adjusted the word DRIVER will be displayed under the temperature setting If the passenger s set temperature has not been adjusted this knob controls both the driver s and passenger s air temperature Passenger s Side Temperature Knob The passenger s side knob can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger s side of the vehicle Turn the knob counterclockwise to lower the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature decreasing as you turn the knob counterclockwise Turn the knob clockwise to increase the cabin temperature The display will show the temperature increasing as you turn the knob clockwise When this knob is adjusted only the word PASS will be displayed under the temperature setting The temperature to the rear seat area is controlled by using this knob Once this knob is used the passenger s set temperature will remain independent of the driver s until the ignition has been turned off Fan Switch The switch with the fan symbol allows you to manually adjust the fan speed Press the
19. press the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass midrange and treble using the AUDIO button To find out how to do this see Setting the Tone following If your vehicle has the Bose radio your audio system allows you to choose from four different equalization settings talk driver normal and spatial These settings can be used while listening to the radio or the CD player Press the AUTO EQ button to scroll through your choices Select TALK when listening to non musical material such as news talk shows sports broadcasts and books on tape This settings makes spoken words sound very clear Select DRIVER to give the driver the best possible sound qualities Select NORMAL to enhance the stereo effect Select SPATIAL to make the listening space seem larger When AUTO EQ NORMAL is displayed the system will provide the best overall Bose performance The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source 3 23 Adjusting the Speakers AUDIO Balance Fade The AUDIO control adjusts balance and fade To adjust balance press the AUDIO control until BAL appears on the display Turn the control to adjust the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers To adjust fade press and hold the AUDIO control until FAD appears on the display Turn the control to adjust the sound to the front or rear speakers The
20. pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable 5 31 If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you don t want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you re stuck but you must use caution If you let your tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you re stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Don t spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer 5 32 NOTICE Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth you can destroy your transmission For information about using tire chains on your vehicle see Tire Chains in the Index Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First turn your steering wheel left and right That will clear the area around your front wheels Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear By slowly spinnin
21. push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish See Shifting Out of PARK PY in the Index REVERSE R Use this gear to back up NOTICE Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging your transmission see Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow in the Index NEUTRAL N In this position your engine doesn t connect with the wheels To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Don t shift out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while your engine is racing NOTICE Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N with the engine racing isn t covered by your warranty DRIVE D This position is for normal driving If you need more power for passing and you re Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push your accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down You ll shift down to the
22. s an air bag for that person Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you re too close to an inflating air bag as you would be if you were leaning forward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for air bag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal air bags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door Anyone who is up against or very close to any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young CAUTION Continued children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see the part of this manual called Children There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Air Bag Readiness Light in the Index for more information 1 23 How the Air Bag Systems Work Where are the air bags The
23. the time of the collision If an air bag inflates you ll need to replace air bag system parts See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section 1 55 Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle and information on starting shifting and braking Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly and what to do if you have a problem ee ds al es eo ES TO Windows Keys Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry System Liftgate Liftglass Theft Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Passlock New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped Automatic Transmission Operation Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK P Shifting Out of PARK P Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You re Parked 2 30 2 30 2 30 2 31 2 31 2 39 2 42 2 44 2 48 2 53 2 55 2 56 2 60 2 60 2 64 2 66 2 68 2 82 Locking Rear Axle All Wheel Drive Option Horn Tilt Wheel Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Accessory Power Outlets OnStar System If Equipped Sunroof Option HomeLink Transmitter Instrument Panel Your Information System Instrument Panel Cluster Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Driver I
24. to normal operation Keys Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons A child or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move Don t leave the keys in a vehicle with children This vehicle has one double sided key for the ignition and door locks It will fit with either side up When a new vehicle is delivered the dealer provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys Keep this number in a safe place If you lose your keys you Il be able to have new ones made easily using this number Your selling dealer should also have this number NOTICE Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in So be sure you have extra keys If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index Door Locks There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle You can use the remote keyless entry system You can use your key to unlock your door from the outside Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children c
25. with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index for more information Used Replacement Wheels Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You can t know how it s been used or how far it s been driven It could fail suddenly and cause an accident If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 6 45 Tire Chains Don t use tire chains There s not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it s contacting your vehicle and don t spin your wheels 6 46 Appearance Care Remember cleaning products can be hazardous Some are toxic Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space When you use anythin
26. you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there s a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it 2 68 Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please get to know your warning lights and gages They re a big help Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center DIC that works along with the warning lights and gages See Driver Information Center DIC in the Index Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the driver s safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds then it will flash for about 55 seconds If the driver s belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the air bag symbol The system checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system
27. your vehicle has a traction system you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions See Traction Assist System in the Index If you don t have a traction system accelerate gently Try not to break the gentle traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more 4 41 Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have an anti lock braking system you ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement See Anti Lock in the Index Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that s covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can t reach around clumps of trees behind buildings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you re actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneuvers 4 42 If You re Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some
28. 1 2 km a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal To turn off the chime move the turn signal lever to the center Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low to high beam push the lever toward the instrument panel To return to low beam headlamps pull the multifunction lever toward you Then release it When the high beams are on this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass Feature This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position To use it pull the turn signal lever toward you then release it If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam your high beam headlamps will turn on They ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you The high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on Release the lever to return to normal operation 2 33 Windshield Wipers S Mist Off You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it For a single wiping cycle turn the band to mist Hold it there until the wipers start Then let go The wipers will stop after one wipe If you want more wipes hold the band on mist longer You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes This can be very useful in light rain or snow Turn the band to choose
29. 20 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 55 Checking Your Restraint Systems 1 21 Right Front Passenger Position 1 55 Replacing Restraint System Parts 1 21 Air Bag Systems After a Crash 1 Rear Seat Passengers Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the power seats how to adjust them and also about the reclining front seatbacks memory seats lumbar adjustments and heated seats Power Seats The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions Move the front of the seat control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion Move the rear of the seat control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion Lift up or push down on the center of the seat control to move the entire seat up or down 1 2 To move the seat forward or rearward slide the seat control forward or rearward To recline the seatback press the vertical control rearward To raise the seatback press the vertical control forward Four Way Power Lumbar Control The driver s and passenger s seatback lumbar support can be adjusted four ways by moving a single control located on the outboard side of the seat cushions To increase or decrease support hold the control forward or rearward To move the lumbar up or down hold the control up or down Keep in mind that as your seating position changes as it may during long trips so should the position of your lumbar support
30. 8 7 Canadian Roadside Assistance 8 4 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone 8 8 Courtesy Transportation TTY Users 8 10 Warranty Information 8 4 Customer Assistance Offices 8 10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United 8 5 GM Mobility Program for Persons States Government with Disabilities 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to the 8 6 Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance Program Canadian Government Features and Benefits 8 11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Oldsmobile Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help contact the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center by calling 1 800 442 6537 In Canada contact GM of Canada Customer Communi
31. Adjust the seat as needed Memory Seat If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the controls are located on the driver s door armrest and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver s seating and outside mirror positions Adjust the driver s seat including the seatback recliner and lumbar and both of the outside mirrors to the desired position Then press and hold button 1 for driver 1 for three seconds A chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored A second mirror and seating position can be programmed by repeating the procedure with a second driver and pressing button 2 for three seconds Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while the vehicle is in PARK P the memory position will be recalled if programmed to do so through the Driver Information Center DIC Each time a memory button is pressed a single chime will sound If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle the preset driver s seat and mirror positions will be recalled The numbers on the back of the transmitters 1 or 2 correspond to the numbers on the memory controls The seat and mirror positions can also be recalled by placing the key in the ignition if programmed to do so through the Driver Information Center DIC To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time press one of the power seat controls or memory buttons T
32. Cli BURNS MANUAL AVOID PULL BELT SPARKS OR out 0 DO NOT INSTALL A FLAMES COMPLETELY VE pelea i WS DAYTIME see THEN SECURE RUNNING ENGINE OIL SERVICE GHIL SEAT IN THIS SEATING Lamps PRESSURE 7 SPARK OR POSITION power k 5 DOOR LOCK ANTI LOCK SERVICE winpow __ UNLOCK BRAKES MANUAL 9 BATTERY FULLY O A REAR FACING BRAKE L ACID COULD REARWARD Vea CHILD RESTRAINT CAUSE IN THIS SEATING ZZ Service Station Guide Windshield Washer See Section 6 Cooling System See Section 6 pa See Section 5 m i Spare Tire Pressure For a More Detailed Look at What s Under the Hood See Section 6 See Section 6 Hood Release See Section 6 Battery See Section6 Engine Oil Dipstick p cane 6 Oil Visc osity Fuel Engine Oil Use unleaded only See Section 6 See Section 6 for octane ratings Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts 1 2 Seats and Seat Controls 1 33 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for 1 8 Safety Belts They re for Everyone Children and Small Adults 1 12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask 1 35 Children About Safety Belts and the Answers 1 39 Restraint Systems for Children 1 13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 52 Older Children 1 14 Driver Position 1 55 Safety Belt Extender 1
33. Control of a Vehicle Braking Traction Assist System TAS Two Wheel Drive Only Steering Off Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle If Equipped Off Paved Roads Driving at Night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Recreational Vehicle Towing Loading Your Vehicle Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Towing a Trailer Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up See Safety Belts in the Index Defensive driving really means be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or freeways it means always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do Be ready for their mistakes Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance It s the best defensive driving maneuver in both city and rural driving You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task Anything that distracts from the driving task such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call readin
34. Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance and Recreational Vehicle Towing in the Index Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Gages in the Index If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when your engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool NOTICE If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly rep
35. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index NOTICE Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass because they may cause scratches Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window since they may have to be scraped off later If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window an electric defogger element may be damaged Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid 6 49 Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield Backglass and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a full strength glass cleaning liquid The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months During very cold damp we
36. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque in the Index Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire in the Index When It s Time for New Tires One way to tell when it s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that can t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage 6 41 Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need look at the Certification Tire label The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specificatio
37. a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining Driving Through Deep Standing Water NOTICE If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through your engine s air intake and badly damage your engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle If you can t avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly 4 34 Driving Through Flowing Water Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this happens you and the other vehicle occupants could drown Don t ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with pr
38. again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning and SC will appear on the display To scan your preset stations press and hold the SEEK SCAN button for more than four seconds PRESET SCAN will appear on the display You will hear a double beep and the P will blink with the preset number Use preset scan to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press the SEEK SCAN button again to stop scanning presets 3 12 Setting Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO To set the bass press and hold the AUDIO button until BASS appears on the display Press the knob above the AUDIO button to extend it then turn the knob to increase o
39. and Rear Turn Signals 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two screws 6 34 from the lamp assembly 3 Pull the assembly away from the vehicle 4 Unclip the wiring harness A and remove the three socket retaining screws B 10 11 Remove the socket by releasing the retaining tabs Holding the socket pull the bulb to release it from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Reinstall the socket and screws Reconnect the wiring harness Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws Close the liftgate Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking See Wiper Blade Check in the Index See Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in the Index for the proper type of replacement blades NOTICE Use care when removing or installing a blade assembly Accidental bumping can cause the arm to fall back and strike the windshield 6 35 1 To remove the old wiper blades lift the wiper arm 3 Remove the insert from the blade assembly until it locks into a vertical position The insert has two notches at one end that are locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly At the notched end pull the insert from the blade assembly A Blade Assembly D Blade Pivot 4 To install the new wiper insert slide the insert D B Arm Assembly E Hook Slot notched end last into the end with
40. and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 97 500 Miles 162 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 13 Scheduled Maintenance 100 000 Miles 166 000 km Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher Inhilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service If you haven t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and therefore haven t changed your automatic transmission fluid change both the fluid and filter Change transfer case fluid 150 000 Miles 240 000 km Drain flush and refill cooling system or every 60 months since last service whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant in the Index for what to use Inspect hos
41. and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof sliding crossrails and places to use for tying things down These let you load some other things on top of your vehicle as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier 2 52 To slide the crossrails to where you want them pull up on the lever on each side of the crossrail This will release the crossrail and allow you to slide it When the crossrail is where you want it push down on the lever to lock it into place NOTICE Loading cargo that weighs more than 220 Ibs 100 kg on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a proper size and weight put it on the slats and distribute the weight evenly Then slide the crossrail up against the rear of the load to help keep it from moving You can then tie it down Cargo containers must be loaded on the crossrails only Don t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading Your Vehicle in the Index To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you re dr
42. back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Older Children Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A If possible an older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts 1 52 Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt can t properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured
43. changer is in use 3 33 Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it will not operate and LOCKED will be displayed When the radio and vehicle are turned off the blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed With THEFTLOCK activated your radio will not operate if stolen 3 34 Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has this feature you can control certain radio functions using the controls on your steering wheel AM FM Press this control to tune to the next radio station When playing a cassette tape or compact disc press AM FM to switch to the radio mpi Program Press this control to tune to the next preset radio station When playing a cassette tape press program to hear the other side of a tape that is playing When using the CD changer this control will seek to the next selection a Volume Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume Understanding Radio Reception AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range however can cause stations to interfere with each other AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it FM Stereo FM stereo will give you th
44. check the level Fmark that shows the proper operating range your engine could be damaged The engine oil fill cap is located in the engine compartment toward the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the L mark then you ll need to add at least one quart of oil But you must use the right kind This part explains what kind of oil to use For crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications in the Index Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when you re through 6 12 ee Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING SELECT THE LOWEST looking for the starburst symbol SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol HOT FOR THIS WEATHER SYMBOL If you change your own oil be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container If you have your oil changed for you be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines EIS You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your SAE 5W 30 ve
45. conditions Jn heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service 6 18 If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions change the fluid and filter every 100 000 miles 166 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick NOTICE Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 90 F 32 C Athigh speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 180 F to 200 F 82 C to 93 C Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15
46. consistent with your driving conditions Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change To reset the Oil Life System press and hold the select button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed Be careful not to reset the engine oil life accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It can t be reset accurately until the next oil change The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual Also the oil change reminder will not detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may affect the oil If you drive in dusty areas change your oil after every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or three months whichever occurs first unless the DIC instructs you to do so sooner Also the oil change reminder does not measure how much oil you have in your engine So be sure to check your oil level often See Engine Oil in the Index Personalization Button You can program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people Press the personalization button to scroll through the following personalization features All of the personalization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on your DIC ALARM WARNING TYPE AUTOMATIC LOCKING AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING SEAT POSITION RECALL If Equipped PERIMETER LIGHTING REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT TILT MIRROR IN REVER
47. display information such as the trip odometer fuel economy and personalization features A Trip Information This button will display the odometer trip odometer and the timer B Fuel Information This button will display the current range average fuel economy instant fuel economy and engine oil life C Personalization This button will change personal options available on your vehicle D Select This button resets certain functions and turns off or acknowledges messages on the DIC 2 82 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the current driver and the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off If a problem is detected a warning message will appear on the display Pressing the select button will acknowledge any current warning or service messages The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four buttons on the DIC These buttons are trip information fuel information personalization and select The button functions are detailed in the following Trip Information Button Use the trip information button to scroll through the odometer TRIP A TRIP B and TIMER Odometer Press the trip information button until the odometer appears on the display This shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers Pressing the reset stem located on the instrument cluste
48. display track or elapsed time press the control until you see the display you want then hold the control until the display flashes AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player 3 30 Using Song List Mode The integrated 6 disc CD changer has a feature called song list This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections To save tracks into SONG LIST perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on and load it with at least one disc See LOAD CD mentioned previously for more information 2 Check to see that the disc changer is not in song list mode S LIST should not appear in the display If S LIST is present press SONG LIST to turn it off 3 Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right arrow button to locate the track that you want to save The track will begin to play 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or more seconds to save the track into memory When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of pressing SONG LIST continuously two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has been saved 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections If you attempt to save more than 20 selections S LIST FULL will appear on the display To play the song list press SONG LIST One beep will be heard and S LIST will appear on the display The recorded tracks will begin to play in the orde
49. facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat 1 49 Although a rear seat is a safer place you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint See Seats in the Index 2 Put the restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 1 50 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 6 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt
50. federal specifications but emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on see Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index and your vehicle may fail a smog check test If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be covered by your warranty Additives Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your authorized GM dealer for service To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing your emission control system to work properly You should not have to add anything to your fuel Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines particularly if they comply with the spe
51. fluid from a sealed container only Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system your brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid NOTICE Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they ll have to be replaced Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Appearance Care in the Index Brake Wear Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won t work well That could lead to an accident When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced 6 31 NOTICE Continuing to drive with worn out brake pa
52. gear In really deep mud the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don t get stuck When you drive on sand you ll sense a change in wheel traction But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is On loosely packed sand as on beaches or sand dunes your tires will tend to sink into the sand This has an effect on steering accelerating and braking You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand This will improve traction 4 28 Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction On these surfaces it s very easy to lose control On wet ice for example the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating And if you do get moving poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control Driving on frozen lakes ponds or rivers can be dangerous Underwater springs currents under the ice or sudden thaws can weaken the ice Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only Driving in Water Light rain causes no special off road driving problems But heavy rain can mean flash flooding and flood waters demand extreme caution Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it If it s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs axles or exhaust pipe don t try it you probably won t get through Also water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicl
53. going through an automatic car wash Windshield Washer Rear Window Washer Wiper There s a paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol on the top of the multifunction lever To spray washer fluid on the windshield push the paddle The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed This control is located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel In freezing weather don t use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking To turn the rear wiper on turn the control to either 1 2 your vision or 3 For delayed wiping turn the control to 1 or 2 For steady wiping turn the control to 3 To turn the wiper off turn the control to 0 To wash the rear window press the washer symbol located in the center of the control The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer However the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer If you can wash your windshield but not your rear window check your fluid level 2 35 Cruise Control If you apply your brakes the cruise control will shut off e Cruise control can be dangerous where you can t drive safely at a steady speed So don t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction c
54. have a top strap If your child restraint has a top strap it should be anchored Anchor brackets for the rear seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle Do not use the rear tie down brackets near the liftgate for top strap tethers Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Raise the head restraint and route the top strap under it 1 43 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children LATCH System Your vehicle may have the LATCH system If it does you ll find anchors A in the rear outside seat positions To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system each seating position with the LATCH system will have two metal tabs where the seat cushion meets the seatback 1 44 In order to use the system you need either a forward facing child restraint that has attaching points B at its base and a top tether anchor C or a rear facing child restraint that has attaching points B as shown here If a LATCH type child restraint isn t attached to its anchorage points the restraint won t be able to protect a child sitting there In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points or use the vehicle s
55. hit something that will trip it a rock a rut etc and roll over Sooner or later an off road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill If this happens you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline Here are some things to consider Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels or if the downhill wheels drop into arut or depression your vehicle can tilt even more A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across When you go straight up or down a hill the length of the wheel base the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels reduces the likelihood the vehicle will For reasons like these you need to decide carefully tumble end over end But when you drive across whether to try to drive across an incline Just because the an incline the much more narrow track width trail goes across the incline doesn t mean you have to the distance between the left and right wheels may drive it The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over Also driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover Driving across an incline that s too steep will make your vehicle roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline don t
56. key to START When the engine starts below 0 F or 18 C do this let go of the key The idle speed will go down as your engine pee War 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition key to START and hold it there When the engine starts let go of the key NOTICE 2 If your engine still won t start or starts but then stops it could be flooded with too much gasoline Holding your key in START for longer than Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key be drained much sooner And the excessive heat in START for about three seconds When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds This clears the extra gasoline can damage your starter motor At 15 seconds the starter will automatically be disengaged Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging from the engine your starter 2 Ifit doesn t start within 10 seconds push the NOTICE accelerator pedal all the way to the floor while you ag hold the ignition key in START When the engine Your engine is designed to work with the starts let go of the key and let up on the accelerator electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical pedal Wait about 15 seconds between each
57. mechanism Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants direct sunlight and extreme heat If they aren t they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use Your radio may display CLEAN PLAYR to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer If this message appears on the display your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player If you notice a reduction in sound quality try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality clean the tape player The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer GM Part No 12344789 3 36 When using a scrubbing action non abrasive cleaning cassette it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape If the cleaning cassette ejects insert the cassette at least three times to ensure thorough cleaning You may als
58. miles 24 km when outside temperatures are above 50 F 10 C If it s colder than 50 F 10 C drive the vehicle in THIRD 3 until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off but this is used only as a reference Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50 F 10 C or more If it s colder than 50 F 10 C you may have to idle the engine longer Should the fluid level be low during this cold check you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows Park your vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in PARK P With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear range pausing for about three seconds in each range Then position the shift lever in PARK P Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more 6 19 Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps Locate the handle with the transmission and lock symbols for the automatic transmission dipstick in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle Sat See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more i
59. months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned ifth b leak h in Seeif Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water there seems to be no lea 7 start the engine again eel and DEX COOL coolant the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down If it doesn t your vehicle needs service Turn off the engine 5 12 NOTICE In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the FULL COLD mark start your vehicle If the overheat warning continues there s one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture di
60. mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices In some cases where service is impractical the driver may be authorized to obtain other service for which reimbursement is provided In many instances mechanical failures are covered under Oldsmobile s comprehensive warranty However when other services are utilized our Roadside Assistance Representatives will explain any payment obligations you might incur For prompt and efficient assistance when calling please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance Representative Location of vehicle Telephone number of your location Vehicle model year and color Mileage of vehicle Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle license plate number Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Oldsmobile s judgement the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service it is added security while traveling for you and your family Remember we re only a phone call away Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance 1 800 442 OLDS 6537 text telephone TTY users call 1 888 889 2438 Canadian Roadside Assistance Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1 800 268 6
61. odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running Simply press the trip odometer button You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed The new one will be set to the correct millage total of the old odometer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information Center DIC For information on how to reset the trip odometer see Driver Information Center DIC in the Index Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm NOTICE Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning area or engine damage will occur 2 67 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions As you will see in the details on the next few pages some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they re working If you are familiar with this section
62. or downhill In short you ve gone right back to nature Off road driving involves some new skills And that s why it s very important that you read this guide You Il find many driving tips and suggestions These will help make your off road driving safer and more enjoyable Before You Go Off Roading There are some things to do before you go out For example be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done Check to make sure all underbody shields if so equipped are properly attached Is there enough fuel Is the spare tire fully inflated Are the fluid levels up where they should be What are the local laws that apply to off roading where you ll be driving If you don t know you should check with law enforcement people in the area Will you be on someone s private land If so be sure to get the necessary permission Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle Put heavier items as far forward as you can Be sure the load is secured properly so driving on the off road terrain doesn t toss things around Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop You or your passengers could be injured Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed
63. reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you may need to add some lubricant When the differential is cold add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1 2 inch 12 mm below the filler plug hole When the differential is at operating temperature warm add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating in the Index A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion Help keep the proper engine temperature Let the warning lights and gages work as they should NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the
64. right front passenger s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s frontal air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 24 The driver s side impact air bag is in the side of the The right front passenger s side impact air bag is in the driver s seatback closest to the door side of the passenger s seatback closest to the door If something is between an occupant and an air bag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear Don t put anything between an occupant and an air bag and don t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering Don t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag 1 26 When should an air bag inflate The driver s and right front passenger s frontal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system s designed threshold level If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn t move or deform the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph 14 to 26 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
65. rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 6 51 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle Don t use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Don t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels 6 52 Cleaning Tires To clean your tires use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner NOTICE When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the f
66. seat exit recall will occur Choose one of the two options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on seat position exit see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index Display Units ENG MET Press the personalization button until DISPLAY UNITS appears in the display To select English or metric press the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices e UNITS ENGLISH UNITS METRIC KM L UNITS METRIC L 100KM If you choose English all information will be displayed in English units For example distance in miles and fuel economy in miles per gallon If you choose metric KM L all information will be displayed in metric units For example distance in kilometers and fuel economy in KM L If you choose metric L 100KM all information will be displayed in metric units For example distance in kilometers and fuel economy in L 100KM Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and end out of the personalization options 2 91 Display Language To select your personalization for display language press the select button while DISPLAY LANGUAGE is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following languages English French Spanish German Ara
67. snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index To turn the system on or off press the TAS on off button located near the shift lever If you used the button to turn the system off the TRAC OFF light on the button will come on and stay on OFF ON You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again The TRAC OFF light on the button should go off If desired you can change the TAS automatic engagement feature so that the system will not come on automatically when the engine is started To do so 1 Park the vehicle with the ignition off and the transmission in PARK P 2 Turn the ignition to RUN do not start the engine 3 Apply the brake pedal press the accelerator pedal to the floor and then press the TAS on off button and hold it down for at least six seconds 4 Release the TAS button and both pedals 5 Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds The next time you start your vehicle the TAS will not automatically come on You can restore the automatic feature by using the same procedure Whether the TAS is set to come on automatically or not you can always turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS on off button Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning you can steer but it will take much more effort Steering Tips Driving on Curves It s important to take curve
68. system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL is not covered by your new vehicle warranty 6 23 What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which won t damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you don t need to add anything else Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 6 24 NOTICE If you use an improper coolant mixture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost wouldn t be covered by your warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system NOTICE If you use the proper coolant you don t have to add extra
69. t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you won t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have anti lock brakes Using Anti Lock Don t pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may feel the brakes vibrate or you may notice some noise but this is normal Braking in Emergencies With anti lock you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Assist System TAS Two Wheel Drive Only Your vehicle has a Traction Assist System TAS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin The LOW TRAC light next to the button will come on when TAS is limiting wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads under some conditions When this happens you may notice a reduction in acceleration This is normal and doesn t mean there s a problem with your vehicle Examples of these conditions include a hard acc
70. the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area 2 21 Automatic Transmission Operation There are several different positions for your shift lever PARK P This position locks your wheels It s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can t move easily It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 22 Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition key is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever press the button on the shift lever and
71. to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button three times The rolling code garage door opener should now recognize HomeLink You may either use HomeLink or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door If after following these instructions you still have problems training the garage door opener contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Canadian Programming Canadian Owners During programming the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after two seconds In this case you should press and hold the HomeLink button see Steps 2 and 3 under Programming the HomeLink Transmitter while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink is trained Operating the HomeLink Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink for at least half of a second The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted Erasing Channels To erase all three programmed channels hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Release both buttons Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink to default settings hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and then release bo
72. to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side When choosing a child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instructions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer 1 41 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat General Motors therefore recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here s why A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s air bag inflates This is b
73. to open it If the liftglass does not unlock when you unlock the liftgate you have to use your key to unlock the liftglass Insert the key into the pushbutton and turn it counterclockwise With the key turned press in the pushbutton to open the liftglass The liftgate cannot be opened if the liftglass is opened To open the entire liftgate lift the handle located in the center of the liftgate Emergency Release for Opening Liftgate 1 Remove the trim plug to expose the access hole in the trim panel 2 Use a screwdriver to reach through the access hole in the trim panel 3 Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate 4 Reattach the trim plug 2 14 Theft Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal However there are ways you can help Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside it s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves so don t do it When you park your vehicle and open the driver s door you ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you Always do this Your ignition and transmission will be locked Also remember to lock the doors Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot close all windows and lock your vehi
74. try parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you don t your engine might not perform properly 2 20 Engine Coolant Heater If Equipped In very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment behind the battery 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord won t reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you don t it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature
75. two blade claws A C Locking Tab E Arm Hook Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the opposite end B The plastic caps C will be forced 2 Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab off as the insert is fully inserted Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from the wiper arm hook 6 36 5 Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom 6 Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm claws Make sure that all other claws are properly hook Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in locked on both sides of the insert slots the hook slot 7 Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly onto the windshield Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement listed earlier in this section for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper blade The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle A Claw in Notch B Correct Installation C Incorrect Installation 6 37 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions Underinflated tires pose the same danger about your tire warranty and where to obtain service as overloaded tires The resulting accident see your Oldsmobile Warranty booklet for details could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maint
76. up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle But please use the following steps to do it safely NOTICE Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be covered by your warranty The ACDelco battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer Do not charge test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won t work and it could damage your vehicle If you don t follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system NOTICE If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles aren t touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you don t want You wouldn t be able to start your vehic
77. when outside temperature is over approximately 40 F 4 C The air inlet will normally be set to outside air If it s hot outside the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculated inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle To find your comfort setting start with a 74 F 23 C temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Turn the driver s or passenger s side temperature knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If you choose the temperature setting of 60 F 15 C the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting 3 4 and fan speed If you choose the temperature setting of 90 F 32 C the system will remain at the maximum heat setting and fan speed Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on your headlamps The EXT exterior temperature sensor is located in the front of the vehicle behind the grille The displayed temperature is most accurate after the vehicle has been moving for a few minutes If the vehicle is stopped and then restarted within 2 1 2 hours the sensor will be hot from the engine heat In this case the temperature first displayed will continue to be the temperature that was displayed before the veh
78. when towing a trailer will minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission Three important considerations have to do with weight the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue and the weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important And it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle Max Trailer Axle Ratio Weight GCWR 2WD 3 73 5 800 lbs 10 500 Ibs 2 633 kg 4 762 kg 4 10 6 300 lbs 11 000 Ibs 2 860 kg 4 989 kg 4WD 3 73 5 600 lbs 10 500 Ibs 2 542 kg 4 762 kg 4 10 6 100 lbs 11 000 Ibs 2 769 kg 4 989 kg The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers cargo equipment and conversion The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded 4 49 You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33171 Detroit MI 48232 5171 In Canada write to General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is
79. will appear on the display Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds press this button again A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received 3 16 Playing a Cassette Tape Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right If the ignition is on but the radio is off the tape can be inserted and will begin playing If you hear nothing but a garbled sound the tape may not be in squarely Press the eject upward pointing arrow button to remove the tape and start over While the tape is playing use the VOLUME POWER AUDIO selector and knob AUTO EQ and the SEEK SCAN controls just as you do for the radio The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off first press the button w
80. you how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The jacking equipment yov ll need is stored under the rear seat on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Rear Seats in the Index for more information on accessing the jacking equipment under the rear seat 5 19 The tools you ll be using include the wheel wrench A tire blocks B extension socket end C handle jack end D and jack E The following instructions explain how to remove the 1 spare tire mounted underneath your vehicle To remove the underbody mounted spare tire insert the socket end of the extension on an angle into the hoist shaft hole in the rear bumper Be sure the socket end of the extension connects into the NOTICE hoist shaft Never remove or restow a tire from to a stowage position under the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by a jack Always tighten the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle when restowing 5 20 2 Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower See Secondary Latch System later in this section When the tire has been completely lowered tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the whee
81. you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher If the octane is less than 87 you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive If it is bad enough it can damage your engine A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered normal This does not indicate a problem exists or that a higher octane fuel is necessary Gasoline Specifications It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection Gasolines meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines In Canada look for the Auto Makers Choice label on the pump Canada Only California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards see the underhood emission control label it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
82. you turn the ignition off and then on again the alternate frequency feature will automatically be turned on Radio Announcements Alert warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished 3 15 TRAF Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used the tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped INFO If the current station has a message INFO
83. your glove box pull the handle on the front of the glove box and lower the door Overhead Console The overhead console includes sunglasses storage ja HomeLink transmitter and a travel note recorder if equipped Sunglasses Storage Compartment To open the sunglasses storage compartment in the overhead console press the release button Then pull the compartment down Travel Note Recorder If Equipped The overhead console may also contain a travel note recorder To record a message press the button with the circle on it and begin speaking Press the button with the circle on it again to stop recording You may also press and hold the button with the circle on it while you are speaking and then let it go when you are finished To play back messages press the button with the right arrow on it Pressing the right arrow button more than once will return you to previously recorded messages If you press and hold this button for more than one second all of the recorded messages will be played back To delete messages press the button with the square on it while the message is playing If you press and hold the right arrow button and the circle button at the same time for a half of a second all of the messages will be deleted Door Storage You will find a storage compartment on each of the front doors Front Storage Area Lift the armrest cover of the console compartment to reveal a coinholder and addition
84. 07130 Detroit MI 48207 OWNER S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner s Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 20 00 Without Portfolio Owner s Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 15 00 CURRENT amp PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form please specify year and model name of the vehicle OR ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time Visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at www helminc com For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover ORDER TOLL FREE Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt Please allow adequate time for postal NOTE For Credit Card Holders Only service If further information is needed write to the address shown below or call 1 800 551 4123 1 800 551 4123 Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM EST information within 30 days of delivery On returns a re stocking fee may be applied FAX Orders Only 1 313 865 5927 www helminc com against the original order PUM AML Neh ITEM DESCRIPTION VEHICEE MOREE QTY NAME _ i YEA Car amp Light Truck Transmission Unit Repai
85. 800 for emergency services Courtesy Transportation Oldsmobile has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for new vehicles The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required This will reduce your inconvenience during watranty repairs Plan Ahead When Possible When your vehicle requires warranty service you should contact your dealer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait Ol
86. A belt must be used by only one person at a time Q What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck A If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window move the child toward the center of the vehicle If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in the Index 1 53 Never do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash 1 54 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten your dealer will order you an extender It s free
87. AGES light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure gages 2 80 Gate Ajar GATE AJAR United States Canada If this light comes on your liftgate or liftglass is ajar Try closing the liftgate or liftglass again Never drive with the liftgate or liftglass even partially open Fuel Gage Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up United States Canada The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about off the ignition how much fuel you have remaining r y 5 Low Fuel Light The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when you are starting the engine This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank See Fuel in the Index 2 81 Driver Information Center DIC The DIC display is located on the instrument panel cluster above the steering wheel The DIC can
88. ES et 0d ee Ze z ez a wo foe LH ow oo fs Oo 6 az ez e Es ee N N J Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage 1 ECAS 3 Passenger s Side 2 Passenger s Side Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp 4 Back Up Trailer Lamps 6 58 Mini Fuses 5 Usage Driver s Side High Beam Headlamp Driver s Side Low Beam Headlamp WASH ATC Windshield Wipers Powertrain Control Module B Fog Lamps ST LP Cigarette Lighter COILS RIDE TBD Ignition 1 Crank Air Bag ELEK Brake Cooling Fan Horn Ignition E ETC Mini Fuses 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 50 51 52 J Case Fuses 32 33 34 35 36 Usage Instrument Panel Cluster Driver Information Center Automatic Shift Lock Control System ENG 1 Back Up Powertrain Control Module 1 Oxygen Sensor Air Conditioning TBC Passenger s Side Trailer TRN Driver s Side Trailer TRN Hazard Flashers Usage Trailer Anti Lock Brakes ABS Ignition A Blower Motor Ignition B 6 59 Micro Relays Usage Rear Underseat Fuse Block 37 Blank 38 Rear Window Washer 39 Fog Lamps 40 Horn 41 Fuel Pump 42 Windshield Wipers Washer 43 High Beam Headlamp 44 Air Conditioning Solid State Usage Relays 45 Cooling Fan 46 HDM The rear underseat fuse block is located under the rear Mini Relay Usage seat on the driver s side of the vehicle 47 Starter Miscellaneous Usage 48 Instrument Panel Battery 49 Fuse Puller
89. ILE Rocket Emblem and the name BRAVADA are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Oldsmobile Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual Please keep this manual in your vehicle so it will be there if you ever need it when you re on the road If you sell the vehicle please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it vi We support voluntary technician certification AS CERTIFIED WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH National Institute for AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE S For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a French Language Manual Aux propri taires canadiens Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais chez votre concessionaire ou au Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 4 Door Utility About Driving Your Vehicle As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read the on pavement and off road driving guidelines in this manual See Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle and Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads in the Index How to Use this Man
90. Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code This code will help you identify your engine specifications and replacement parts Service Parts Identification Label You ll find this label on the inside of the glove box It s very helpful if you ever need to order parts On this label is your VIN the model designation paint information and e a list of all production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle 6 55 Electrical System Headlamps Add On Electrical Equipment The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses An electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off If this happens have your headlamp wiring checked NOTICE right away Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem be sure to get it fixed Don t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to Power accesso
91. In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash For both frontal and side impact air bags the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the air bag The inflator air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel instrument panel and the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door How does an air bag restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and side impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward the air bag 1 27 Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions including frontal or near frontal collisions rollovers and rear impacts primarily because an occupant s motion is not toward those air bags Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driv
92. Index If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift lever all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into the gear you want If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to LOCK 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want 5 Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible 2 28 Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Don t park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you can t see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if e Your exhaust system sounds strange or different Your vehicle gets rusty underneath Your vehicle was damaged in a collision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs weren t done correctly Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed immediately Running Your Engine While You re P
93. Oldsmobile 2002 BRAVADA 2 hopin biche for 1 800 442 OLDS f under warranty is For vehicles purchased in Canada backed with the SE call 1 800 268 6800 a ices that provides in an emergency Free lockout assistance gt Free dead battery assistance Courtesy Free out of fuel assistance Transportation Free flat tire change Emergency towing 2002 Oldsmobile Bravada Owner s Manual Litho in Copyright General Motors Corporation 2000 rained First Edition All Rights Reserved Table of Contents Seats and Restraint Systems Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts Air Bag Systems Restraint Systems for Children Features and Controls Windows Keys and Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry System Liftgate Liftglass Automatic Transmission All Wheel Drive If Equipped Parking Brake Tilt Wheel Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Windshield Wipers VVVVVVVVYVY Cruise Control Exterior and Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Luggage Carrier Accessory Power Outlets OnStar System If Equipped Sunroof Option HomeLink Transmitter Instrument Panel Warning Lights and Gages Table of Contents cont d 2 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems Heating and Air Conditioning Setting the Radio Clock Radio Cassette Player CD Player Radio Theft Deterrent Feature Steering Wheel Controls Y
94. Q setting for your CD it will be activated each time you play a CD As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display If an error appears on the radio display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section 1 REV Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time Release it to play the passage 2 FWD Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time Release it to play the passage 4 RDM Press this button to hear the tracks in random rather than sequential order RDM and the track number will appear on the display Press this button again to turn off random mode AUTO EQ Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc SEEK SCAN To seek press the reverse left pointing arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played Press the forward right pointing arrow to go to the next track If you hold the button or press it more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc To scan press and hold the SEEK SCAN button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN appears on the display and Use scan to l
95. SE If Equipped EASY EXIT SEAT If Equipped DISPLAY UNITS E M DISPLAY LANGUAGE The driver s preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the appropriate memory button 1 or 2 located on the driver s door 2 85 Alarm Warning Type Press the personalization button until ALARM WARNING TYPE appears in the display To select your personalization for alarm warning type press the select button while ALARM WARNING TYPE is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices ALARM WARNING BOTH default ALARM WARNING OFF ALARM WARNING HORN ALARM WARNING LAMPS If you choose BOTH the headlamps will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is active If you choose OFF there will be no alarm warning on activation If you choose HORN the horn will chirp when the alarm is active If you choose LAMPS the headlamps will flash when the alarm is active Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on alarm warning type see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index 2 86 Automatic Locking Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC LOCKING appears in the display To select your personalization for automatic locking press the select button while AUTOMATIC LOCKING is displ
96. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you re driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY LEFT APPROX QUARTER TURN edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway 4 13 Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneuver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road t
97. When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you The extender will be just for you and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose Don t let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you ve had a crash do you need new belts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new belts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn t being used at
98. about when driving over rough terrain You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects Secure the cargo properly Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle s center of gravity making it more likely to roll over You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over Put heavy loads inside the cargo area not on the roof Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible You ll find other important information in this manual See Vehicle Loading Luggage Carrier and Tires in the Index 4 17 Environmental Concerns Off road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation However it also raises environmental concerns Oldsmobile recognizes these concerns and urges every off roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment Always use established trails roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off road recreational driving obey all posted regulations Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment shrubs flowers trees grasses or disturb wildlife this includes wheel spinning breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground e Always carry a litter bag make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving Take extreme care with open fires where permitted camp stoves and lanterns Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustib
99. ace for up to three seconds A light on the mirror will be lit when the feature is turned on It will go out when the feature is turned off Compass Operation Press the on off button once to turn the compass on or off There is a compass display in the window in the upper right corner of the mirror face The compass displays a maximum of two characters For example NE is displayed for north east Compass Calibration Press and hold the on off button for nine seconds to activate the compass calibration mode CAL will be displayed in the compass window on the mirror The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display shows CAL or drive the vehicle on your everyday routine This method may take longer to calibrate 2 45 Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the following 1 Find your current location and variance zone number o
100. acted Stolen Vehicle Tracking Call the center at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 to report your vehicle stolen The system can then locate and track your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify the proper authorities Roadside Assistance with Location For vehicle breakdowns press the OnStar button An advisor will contact the appropriate help Remote Diagnostics If an instrument panel light comes on the center can perform a check of the engine on board computer An advisor can then recommend what action needs to be taken 2 58 OnStar MED NET Med Net can store your personal medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if necessary Requires activation and additional fee Remote Door Unlock To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge Vehicle Locator Service To contact the center call 1 888 4 ONSTAR You will be required to provide your security information An advisor will send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn and or flash the lamps In order to provide you with excellent service calls with the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded Premium Services Includes Safety and Security Services Route Support An advisor can
101. age between oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 12 000 miles 20 000 km since your last oil and filter change Under severe conditions the system may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months whichever occurs first without an oil change The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner Remember to reset the CHANGE ENG OIL light whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the CHANGE ENG OIL Light To reset the CHANGE ENG OIL light do the following 1 Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds If the CHANGE ENG OIL light flashes for five seconds the system is reset If the light does not flash repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Don t let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a real threat to the environme
102. ain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them CAUTION Continued 6 38 Inflation Tire Pressure The Certification Tire label which is on the driver s door edge above the door latch shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they re cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than mile 1 6 km NOTICE Don t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right It s not If your tires don t have enough air underinflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy NOTICE Continued NOTICE Continued If your tires have too much air overinflation you can get the following Unusual wear Bad handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards When to Che
103. airs would not be covered by your warranty If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow atrailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 If your air conditioner is on turn it off 2 Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary 3 If you re in a traffic jam shift to NEUTRAL N otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving DRIVE D or THIRD 3 5 10 If you no longer have the overheat warning you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning doesn t come back on you can drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there s still no sign of steam push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you re parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away Cooling System When you decide it s safe to lift the hood here s what you ll see A Cool
104. al storage 2 49 Convenience Net If Equipped A convenience net in the rear of your vehicle helps keep small items like gloves and light clothing in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts The net is not designed to retain these items during off road use The net is not for larger heavier items To use the convenience net do the following 1 Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the liftgate opening the label should be in the upper passenger s side corner visible from the rear of the vehicle 2 Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs on the floor 2 50 Cargo Security Shade If Equipped You can use the cargo security shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle To install the security shade do the following 1 Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel located behind the rear seat 2 Compress the opposite endcap align it with the pocket located on the opposite side of the trim panel and release 3 Grasp the handle and unroll the cover Latch the posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle to secure it To remove the security shade do the following 1 Release the shade from the latch posts and carefully roll it back up 2 Compress one endcap and remove it from the pocket in the trim panel 3 Remove the security shade from the other endcap so that you can remove the shade from the vehicle An improperly stored cargo c
105. an cause needless wheel Off spinning and you could lose control 1 On Don t use cruise control on slippery roads Resume Accelerate 6 Set With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph 40 km h 2 36 Setting Cruise Control If you leave your cruise control switch on when you re not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don t want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control 1 Move the cruise control switch to on 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal The accelerator petal will not go down a CRUISE United States Canada The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake This of course shuts off the cruise control But you don t need to reset it Once you re going about 25 mph 40 km h or more you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to resume accelerate You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there If you h
106. an easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle won t open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren t locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop The manual lever on each rear door works only that your vehicle Locking your doors can help door s lock prevent this from happening You can lock or unlock the door from the inside by sliding the manual lever forward or rearward When the door is unlocked you can see a red area on the lever Power Door Locks T The power door lock T switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s armrests Remove the ignition key and press lock symbol to lock all of the doors at once To unlock the doors press the other side of the switch Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle s power door locks You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center DIC or by the following method Programmable Locking Feature The foll
107. an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading Your Vehicle in the Index for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 50 If you re using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver s door or see Tire Loading in the Index Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It s important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why
108. and wants you to be happy with it We hope you ll go to your dealer for all your service needs You ll get genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people We hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco n T NINE adele Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work you ll want to use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Your vehicle has an air bag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform See Maintenance Record in the Index You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work ona vehicle without knowing enough about it Besure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fasteners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things
109. ant Recovery Tank B Radiator Pressure Cap C Engine Fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling don t do anything else until it cools down When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark If it isn t you may have a leak in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Don t touch them If you do you can be burned Don t run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle 5 11 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant NOTICE Recovery Tank Engine d f g If you haven t found a problem yet but the coolant level SME CAMASE TOM TUNNDE YOUL Enge isn t at the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of without coolant isn t covered by your warranty clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank See Engine Coolant in the Index for more information NOTICE When adding coolant it is important that you use only DEX COOL silicate free coolant If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion may result In addition the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24
110. ard also The head restraints lock into place when raised To release the head restraint and lower it press the tab located on the top of the seatback Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space Pull up on the tab located where the seat cushion meets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and out of the way This will allow the seatback to fold flat and increase the cargo area The rear seatback handles are located on the outboard side of the rear seatbacks Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the handle The head restraint will automatically fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down To raise the seatbacks lift up the seatbacks and push on them until they lock into the upright position Push and pull on the seatbacks to make sure that they are latched securely Then fold the bottom seat cushion back into place To return the head restraint to the upright position reach behind the seats and pull the restraint up until it locks into place Push and pull on the head restraints to make sure that they are latched securely Safety Belts They re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts And it explains the air bag system Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t wear a safety belt properly If you are in a crash and you r
111. aring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and aren t even aware of it 4 31 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads i j M Hy Why HMA Wy ji my if m W 7 Yy iy Hy yi i M m Wh Hp 4 M f i W Ty Lif ge A Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble On a wet road you can t stop accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads 4 32 And if your tires don t have much tread left you ll get even less traction It s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a he
112. arked It s better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle See the earlier Caution under Engine Exhaust Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with CO can come in easily NEVER park ina garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a blizzard See Blizzard in the Index 2 29 It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you ve left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t move See Shifting Into PARK P in the Index If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index 2 30 Locking Rear Axle Your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow mud ice sand or gravel It works like a standard axle most of the time but when on
113. at contains detailed warranty information 8 10 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 or 366 0123 in the Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should immediately notify Transport Canada in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited You may write to Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa Ontario K1A ON5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this we certainly hope you ll notify us Please call us at 1 800 442 6537 o
114. ather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 50 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Don t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish You can get GM approved cleaning products from you
115. ations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types PTYs These buttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 2 Press P TYPE if it is not already on 3 Turn the TUNE RCL P TYPE control to select a PTY 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 25 Radio Announcements Alert Warns of national or local emergencies You will not be able to turn off alert announcements ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player is playing play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished INFO If the current station has a message INFO will appear on the display Press this button to see the message If the whole message does not appear on the display parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds press this button again A new group of words will appear on the display Once the complete message has been displayed INFO will disappear
116. avy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you can t try to slow down before you hit them Wet brakes can cause accidents They won t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road 4 33 Hydroplaning doesn t happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if
117. ayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK default LOCK DOORS MANUALLY LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED If you choose for the doors to lock out of park the doors will lock when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK P If you choose for the doors to lock manually the doors will not be locked automatically If you choose for the doors to lock with speed the doors will lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph 13 km h for three seconds Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks in the Index Automatic Unlocking Press the personalization button until AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING appears in the display To select your personalization for automatic unlocking press the select button while AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices UNLOCK ALL IN PARK default UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK If you choose for all the doors to unlock in park all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P If you choose for all the doors to unlock at key out all of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition If you choose for the door
118. bags inflate if battery power is available You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag Air bags are designed to inflate only once After an air bag inflates you ll need some new parts for your air bag system If you don t get them the air bag system won t be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information about the frontal air bag system The module records information about the readiness of the system when the system commands air bag inflation and driver s safety belt usage at deployment The module also records speed engine rpm brake and throttle data Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag systems Improper service can mean that an air bag system won t work properly See your dealer for service NOTICE If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s air bag or the air bag covering on the driver s and right front passenger s seatback the bag may not work properly You may
119. battery power Remember the theft deterrent system won t activate if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock It activates only if you use a power door lock switch with the door open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off Here s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed e Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm If you set off the alarm by accident unlock any door with the key You can also turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter The alarm won t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way 2 16 Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps 1 From inside the vehicle lower the driver s window and open the driver s door 2 Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open or with the remote keyless entry transmitter 3 Get out of the vehicle close the door and wait for the SECURITY light to go out 4 Then reach in through the window unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door This should set off the alarm
120. bic Portuguese Japanese Italian Arabic Portuguese Japanese and Italian will only be available as choices if they are enabled in the vehicle Choosing any of the above languages will display all of the information on the DIC in the desired language 2 92 If you accidentally choose a language that you don t want or understand press and hold the personalization button and the trip information button and the same time The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language English will be in English French will be in French and so on When you see the language that you would like release both buttons The DIC will then display the information in the language you chose Choose one of the eight options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it Select Button The select button is used to reset certain functions and turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC display The select button also toggles through the options available in each personalization menu For example this button will reset the trip odometers turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message and toggle through the languages you can select the DIC to display information in DIC Warnings and Messages Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition More than one messag
121. brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Your trailer s brake system can tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system only if The trailer parts can withstand 3 000 psi 20 650 kPa of pressure The trailer s brake system will use less than 0 02 cubic inch 0 3 cc of fluid from your vehicle s master cylinder Otherwise both braking systems won t work well You could even lose your brakes If everything checks out this far then make the brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes But don t use copper tubing for this If you do it will bend and finally break off Use steel brake tubing 4 52 Driving with a Trailer If you have a rear most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death See Engine Exhaust in the Index To maximize your safety when towing a trailer Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the rear most windows closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh outside air into your vehicle Do not use recirculation because it only recirculates the air inside y
122. c will begin to play automatically To insert multiple discs do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and hold the LOAD CD button for two seconds You will then hear a beep and the light located to the right of the slot will begin to flash Once the light stops flashing and turns green load a disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in Once the disc is loaded the light will begin flashing again Once the light stops flashing and turns green you can then load another disc The disc player takes up to six discs Do not try to load more than six When a disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If more than one disc has been loaded a number for each disc will be displayed If you select an EQ setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the last disc loaded will begin to play automatically To load more than one disc but less than six complete Steps 1 2 and 3 When you have finished loading discs with the radio on or off press the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded As each new track starts to play the track number will appear on the display 3 27 Playing a Specific Loaded Compact Disc For every CD loaded a number will appear on the radio display To play a specific CD first press the CD AUX button to start playing a CD Th
123. care that someone isn t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your mirrors glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your right outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is e Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn If you re being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration don t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency don t give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care
124. cation Centre in Oshawa by calling 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Oldsmobile please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern STEP THREE Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you should file with the GM BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be re
125. ccupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it s more likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger s safety belt properly see Driver Position earlier in this section The right front passenger s safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for one thing If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this happens just let the belt go back all the way and start again Air Bag Systems This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag systems Your vehicle has four air bags a frontal air bag for the driver another frontal air bag for the right front passenger a side impact air bag for the driver
126. ccurs first Reset the system The system will show you when to change the oil usually between 3 000 miles 5 000 km and 12 000 miles 20 000 km since your last oil change Under severe conditions the indicator may come on before 3 000 miles 5 000 km Never drive your vehicle more than 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months without an oil and filter change 7 6 The system won t detect dust in the oil So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or sooner if the CHANGE ENG OIL light appears Remember to reset the Oil Life System when the oil and filter have been changed See Oil Life System in the Index for information on resetting An Emission Control Service Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHANGE ACTUAL ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 7 Scheduled Maintenance ENGINE OIL CHANGE 7 8 Scheduled Maintenance 7 500 Miles 12 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 15 000 Miles 25 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional informatio
127. ce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway 4 12 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these problems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you can t there isn t room That s the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes See Braking in Emergencies earlier in this section It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object
128. ced BATTERY NOT CHARGING If the battery is not charging during operation this message will appear on the DIC Driving with this problem could drain your battery Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display 2 93 SERVICE AIR BAG If there is a problem with the air bag system this message will be displayed on the DIC Have a qualified technician inspect the system for problems Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM If a problem occurs with the brake system this message will appear on the DIC If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the brake system needs service TURN SIGNAL ON If a turn signal is left on for 3 4 of a mile 1 2 km this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Move the turn signal multifunction lever to the off position Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display 2 94 REAR ACCESS OPEN If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in RUN this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass Restart the vehi
129. ch to custom To set the midrange to the middle position select MID and press and hold the AUDIO control The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press and hold the AUDIO control when no tone or speaker control is active The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display To set the treble press the AUDIO control until TREB appears on the display Turn the control to increase or decrease treble When you use this control the radio s tone setting will switch to custom If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble To set treble to the middle position select TREB and press and hold the AUDIO control The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press and hold the AUDIO control when no tone or speaker control is active The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display AUTO EQ This feature allows you to choose preset bass midrange and treble equalization settings designed for country jazz talk pop rock and classical stations The setting last chosen will appear on the display when you first press AUTO EQ Each time you press this button another setting will appear on the display and AUTO EQ will switch to one of the preset settings previously listed To return to the manual mode CUSTOM
130. check includes the air bag sensors the air bag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the air bag system see Air Bag in the Index This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your air bag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the air bag system may not be working properly The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 69 Charging System Indicator Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition but the engine is not running as a check to show you it is working It should go out once the engine is running If it stays on or comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging syste
131. cifications described earlier NOTICE Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Don t use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage wouldn t be covered under your warranty Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel may be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn t be covered by your warranty To check on fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you ll be driving Filling Your Tank Gasoline vapor is highly flammable It burns violently and that can cause very bad injuries Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from gasoline The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver s side of your vehicle 6 6 While refueling hang the fuel cap by the tether using the hook located on the inside of the filler door To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly to the left counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if you let go of the cap too soon it will spring back to the right When you put the fuel cap back on turn it to the right clockwise until you hea
132. ck Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You can t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 39 Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 6 000 to 8 000 miles 10 000 to 13 000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It s Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement later in this section for more information Make sure the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals 6 40 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification Tire label
133. cle Remember to keep your valuables out of sight Put them in a storage area or take them with you Parking Lots Even if you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle it s still best to lock it up and take your keys But what if you have to leave your ignition key What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle Put your valuables in a storage area like your glove box If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system take the transmitter with you Lock all the doors except the driver s Then take the door key with you Content Theft Deterrent If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a content theft deterrent alarm system SECURITY United States Canada With this system the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system Here s how to do it 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter The SECURITY light should come on and stay on 3 Close all doors The SECURITY light should go off after approximately 30 seconds The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY light goes off 2 15 If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter the alarm will go off The headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes and the horn will sound for 30 seconds then will turn off to save the
134. cle and check for the message on the DIC display Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display FUEL LEVEL LOW If the fuel level is low in the vehicle s gas tank this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime Refuel as soon as possible Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display CHANGE TRANS FLUID If this message appears on the DIC it is time to change the transmission fluid Take you vehicle in for service as soon as possible Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display CHECK OIL LEVEL If the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will appear on the DIC Check the oil level and correct it as necessary You may need to need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will clear Once the problem is corrected pressing the select button will clear this message from the DIC display CHECK WASHER FLUID If the washer fluid level is low this message will appear on the DIC Adding washer fluid will clear the message Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot this message will appear on the DIC Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle Stop the vehicle and let it i
135. d cause What s the surface like Smooth Rough Slippery loss of control and a serious accident Apply the Hard packed dirt Gravel brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control 4 24 Q Are there some things I should not do Q Am I likely to stall when going downhill sis pama KETE ENE E D It s much more likely to happen going uphill A Yes These are important because if you But if it happens going downhill here s what to do ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident When driving downhill avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill A hill that s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across You could roll over if you don t drive straight down Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL N This is called free wheeling Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes Apply the parking brake Shift to PARK P and while still braking restart the engine Shift back to a low gear release the parking brake and drive straight down If the engine won t start get out and get help 4 25 Driving Across an Incline e Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill Loose gravel muddy spots or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways downhill If the vehicle slips sideways it can
136. d under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle 1 32 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head 1 Slide the guide off its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback There is one guide for each of the outside passenger positions in the rear seat To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts Here s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt 1 33 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 34 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passenge
137. dio system to its previous settings This button will also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated Volume Control You can control the volume of the OnStar System using either the volume control knob on the radio or using the steering wheel volume control if equipped Telltale Light This light will indicate the status of the system A solid green light will come on when you start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is ready to make or receive calls If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or outgoing call is in progress Press the Call ANSWER END button if you notice the light blinking and you are not on a call The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system malfunction If this occurs press the OnStar button to attempt to contact an advisor If the connection is made the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make sure that the system is functioning properly If you cannot contact the advisor take your vehicle to your dealership as soon as possible for assistance 2 57 Safety and Security Services Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment If an air bag deploys a priority emergency signal is automatically sent to the center An advisor will locate your vehicle s position try to contact you and assist you in the situation If the center is unable to contact you an emergency service provider will be cont
138. dle to allow the transmission to cool This message will clear when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level ICE POSSIBLE If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice could form on the roadway this message may appear on the DIC If the temperature rises to a safe level the message will clear Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display DRIVER DOOR AJAR If the driver s door is not fully closed this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display 2 95 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR If the passenger s door is not fully closed this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR If the driver s side rear door is not fully closed this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will ackn
139. ds could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets See Brake System Inspection in Section 7 of this manual under Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 6 32 Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble Brake Adjustment Every time you make a brake stop your disc brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts If you don t your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle the ba
140. dsmobile helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs reimbursement up to 30 per day five days maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus In addition should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to 10 per day five day maximum may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts Courtesy Rental Vehicle When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained at actual cost up to a maximum of 30 00 per day supported by receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and ma
141. e seatback and cushion until the seat temperature is near body temperature The medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat cushion to a slightly higher temperature You will be able to feel heat in about two minutes To heat only the seatback press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol Press the vertical button to heat the whole seat The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition is turned off Power Reclining Front Seatbacks The vertical power seat control described earlier allows the seatback to recline Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts can t do their job when you re reclined like this The shoulder belt can t do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt can t do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly But don t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash The head restraints tilt forward and rearw
142. e best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to come and go Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following e Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly NOTICE Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio be sure you can add what you want If you can it s very important to do it properly Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine Delphi Delco Electronics radio or other systems and even damage them Your vehicle s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly So before adding sound equipment check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units 3 35 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality ruined cassettes or a damaged
143. e braking by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any anti lock brake system ABS helps avoid only the braking skid 4 16 Operating Your All Wheel Drive Vehicle If Equipped Off Paved Roads Many of the same design features that help make your vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather conditions features like the locking rear axle and all wheel drive help make it much better suited for off road use than a conventional passenger car Its higher ground clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off road obstacles But your vehicle doesn t have features like special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear range things that are usually thought necessary for extended or severe off road service This guide is for operating your vehicle off paved roads Also see Anti Lock Brakes in the Index Off road driving can be great fun But it does have some definite hazards The greatest of these is the terrain itself Off roading means you ve left the great North American road system behind Traffic lanes aren t marked Curves aren t banked There are no road signs Surfaces can be slippery rough uphill
144. e collision There s something else about drinking and driving that many people don t know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please don t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accelerator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you re driving on snow or ice it s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide That means you can lose control of your vehicle 4 6 Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That s perception time Then you have to bring
145. e jack handle counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 12 Use the wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown 5 28 Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 lb ft 140 N m NOTICE Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place The underbody mounted spare tire or flat road tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing up If the tire is stored with its valve stem pointing downward its secondary latch won t work properly and the spare tire or flat road tire could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle If this happened when your vehicle was being driven the tire might contact a person or another vehicle causing injury and of course damage to i
146. e may appear at one time they will appear one behind the other Some messages may not require immediate action but you should press the select button to acknowledge that you received the message and clear it from the display Some messages cannot be cleared from the display because they are more urgent These message required action before they can be removed from the DIC display The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them ENGINE COOLANT HOT IDLE ENGINE If the cooling system temperature gets hot this message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in PARK P to allow the coolant to reach a safe temperature This message will clear when the coolant temperature drops to a safe operating temperature ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE If Equipped If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation this message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage This message will clear when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE If low oil pressure levels occur this message will be displayed on the DIC Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle servi
147. e not wearing a safety belt your injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up See Safety Belt Reminder Light in the Index In most states and Canadian provinces the law says to wear safety belts Here s why They work You never know if you ll be in a crash If you do have acrash you don t know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work W
148. e of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle All Wheel Drive Option There is no lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle It is fully automatic and adjusts as needed for road conditions Your vehicle has an active transfer case allowing two wheel drive operation on dry roads The transfer case will shift automatically into all wheel drive on slippery surfaces You may feel an extra shift when the all wheel drive engages Horn To sound the horn press on or near the horn symbols on the center pad of the steering wheel Tilt Wheel You should adjust the steering wheel before you drive The tilt lever is located on the driver s side of the steering column under the turn signal lever You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level then release the lever to lock the wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following e Q gt Turn and Lane Change Signals e D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Flash to Pass Feature e SY Windshield Wipers e QW Windshield Washer Cruise Control 2 31 Turn and Lane Change Signal
149. e other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable doesn t go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to the remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery The remote negative terminal on your vehicle is located on the front engine lift bracket and is marked GND Connect the other end of 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery the negative cable to If it won t start after a few tries it probably the remote negative needs service terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery NOTICE Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly To prevent electrical shorting take care that they don t touch each other or any other metal The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty 10 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C
150. e parts If the water isn t too deep then drive through it slowly At fast speeds water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water And as long as your tailpipe is under water you ll never be able to start your engine When you go through water remember that when your brakes get wet it may take you longer to stop Driving through rushing water can be dangerous Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown If it s only shallow water it can still wash away the ground from under your tires and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over Don t drive through rushing water See Driving Through Water in the Index for more information on driving through water 4 29 After Off Road Driving Driving at Night Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody chassis or under the hood These accumulations can be a fire hazard After operation in mud or sand have the brake linings cleaned and checked These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking Check the body structure steering suspension wheels tires and exhaust system for damage Also check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off road use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information
151. e sure that the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surfaces are damaged they could interfere with radio reception NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear side windows with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may affect your radio s ability to pick up stations clearly The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna over the grid lines Chime Level Adjustment The volume level of the vehicle s chimes can be controlled by the radio To change the volume level press and hold pushbutton six with the ignition on and the radio power off The chime volume level will change from the normal level to loud and LOUD will be displayed on the radio To change back to the default or normal setting press and hold pushbutton six again The chime level will change from the loud level to normal and NORMAL will be displayed 3 37 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions We ve also included many other useful tips on driving Defensive Driving Drunken Driving
152. e that they will respond to the call in a timely manner or at all 2 59 Sunroof Option Your vehicle may have a power sliding sunroof To open or close the sunroof the ignition must be on or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index Press and release the back of the button in the overhead console to open the sunroof You can press the front of the button to close the sunroof Once the sunroof is closed press the forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you can pull forward to block out sun rays 2 60 HomeLink Transmitter This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment Programming the HomeLink Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage d
153. e trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you 4 53 Making Turns NOTICE Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you re about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working 4 54 Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well You can tow in DRIVE D You may want to shift the
154. ecause the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat outside position You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat but before you do always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat outside position 1 42 Wherever you install it be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Top Strap Some child restraints have a top strap or top tether It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision For it to work a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle If the child restraint does not have a top strap one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Once you have the top strap anchored you ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer s instructions say In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap and that the strap be anchored In the United States some child restraints also
155. egular brake to stop the vehicle Then apply the parking brake Shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back straight down Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle it s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around If you can t make it up the hill you must back straight down the hill 4 23 Q Suppose after stalling I try to back down Are there hidden surface obstacles Ruts the hill and decide I just can t do it Logs Boulders What should I do What s at the bottom of the hill Is there a hidden Set the parking brake put your transmission in creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks PARK P and turn off the engine Leave the If you decide you can go down a hill safely then try to vehicle and go get some help Exit on the uphill keep your vehicle headed straight down and use a low side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would gear This way engine drag can help your brakes and take if it rolled downhill they won t have to do all the work Descend slowly keeping your vehicle under control at all times Driving Downhill When off roading takes you downhill you ll want to consider a number of things How steep is the downhill Will I be able to maintain vehicle control Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade This coul
156. ehicle purchase lease See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details When calling from outside Canada please dial 1 905 644 3063 All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 8 5 Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance Program Features and Benefits Security While You Travel 1 800 442 OLDS 6537 As the proud owner of a new Oldsmobile vehicle you are automatically enrolled in the Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance program 8 6 This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road Oldsmobile s Roadside Assistance toll free number is staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year We will provide the following services during the Bumper to Bumper warranty period at no expense to you Fuel delivery Lock out service identification required Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty service or in the event of a vehicle disabling accident Flat tire change Jump starts Minor repairs to disabled vehicles Assistance when vehicle is mired in sand mud or snow Trip routing Trip interruption expense benefits Dealership locator service Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance specifically excludes coverage for
157. eleration in a turn an abrupt upshift or downshift of the transmission or driving on rough roads If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage When road conditions allow you to safely use it again you may re engage the cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index When the TRAC OFF light on the button is on the TAS is off and will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly The TRAC OFF light on the button will come on under the following conditions The Traction Assist System is turned off either by pressing the TAS on off button or turning off the automatic engagement feature of the TAS The transmission is in FIRST 1 TAS will not operate in this gear This is normal The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road When the vehicle leaves the rough surface slows down or stops the light will go off and TAS will be on again This is normal e A Traction Assist System Anti Lock Brake System or engine related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service 4 10 The Traction Assist System as delivered from the factory will automatically come on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave the system on But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud or
158. em allows you to choose from four different AUTO EQ settings talk driver normal and spatial The AUTO EQ settings can be used while listening to the radio the cassette tape player or CD player Press the AUTO EQ button to scroll through your choices Select TALK when listening to non musical material such as news talk shows sports broadcasts and books on tape This setting makes spoken words sound very clear Select DRIVER to give the driver the best possible sound qualities Select NORMAL to enhance stereo effect Select SPATIAL to make the listening space seem larger When AUTO EQ NORMAL is displayed the system will provide the best overall Bose performance The radio keeps separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source 3 13 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade AUDIO This button adjusts balance and fade To adjust balance press and hold the AUDIO button until BAL appears on the display Press the knob above the AUDIO button to extend it then turn the knob to adjust the sound to the left or right speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers To adjust fade press and hold the AUDIO button until FAD appears on the display Press the knob above the AUDIO button to extend it then turn the knob to adjust the sound to the front or rear speakers The middle position balances the sound between the speakers Using RDS Mode Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS mode give
159. en You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you start your engine shift into a gear and release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you re pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid don t overfill engine oil axle lubricant belt cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 55 Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle is equipped with a seven wire trailer towing harness This harness has a seven pin universal heavy duty trailer connector that is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform 4 56 The seven wire harness contains the following trailer circuits Yellow Left Stop Turn Signal Dark Green Right Stop Turn Signal Brown Running Lamps White Ground Light Green Back up Lamps Red Battery Feed Dark Blue Electric Brakes If you need to tow a light duty trailer with a s
160. en press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play A small bar will appear under the CD number that is playing and the track number will appear If an error appears on the radio display see Compact Disc Messages later in this section LOAD CD This button will eject a disc or discs if you have multiple discs loaded To eject a disc or discs from the disc player perform one of the following steps Press and release the LOAD CD eject button to eject the disc that is currently playing or to eject all of the discs press the LOAD CD eject button for two seconds you will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a disc is being ejected When the LOAD CD eject button is pressed the receiver will eject the disc and REMOVE CD will be displayed You can now remove the disc If the disc is not removed after 25 seconds the disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver 3 28 If you try to push the disc back into the receiver before the 25 second time period is complete the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc several times before stopping Do not repeatedly press the LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have tried to push it in manually The receivers 25 second eject timer will reset at each press of eject which will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the 25 second time period has elapsed Once the player stops and t
161. ep will be heard and S LIST will be removed from the display 3 31 Compact Disc Messages Check CD If this message appears on the radio display it could be due to one of the following conditions The road is too rough The disc should play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 32 Rear Seat Audio This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the music sources including AM FM cassette tapes or CDs and to use automatic tone control The rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to For example rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones The front seat audio controls always override the rear seat audio controls This feature is intended for rear seat passengers The following functions are controlled by the rear seat audio system buttons PWR Press this button to turn the rear seat audio system on or off The rear speakers will be muted when the powe
162. eplace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Remove the three screws on the engine air cleaner filter and lift off the cover Twist out the old engine air cleaner filter and replace it with a new one Reinstall the cover Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Don t drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off NOTICE If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you re driving 6 17 Automatic Transmission Fluid When to Check and Change A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change both the fluid and filter every 15 000 miles 25 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service Change both the fluid and filter every 50 000 miles 83 000 km if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
163. er s and right front passenger s frontal air bags and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact air bags What will you see after an air bag inflates After an air bag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated Some components of the air bag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag the side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front passenger s side impact air bags will be hot for a short time The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch 1 28 There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags Air bag inflation doesn t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle When an air bag inflates there is dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but can t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
164. er neck may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck 8 Then replace the pressure cap At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck reinstall the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight Engine Fan Noise This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan When the clutch is engaged the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine In most everyday driving conditions the clutch is not engaged This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise Under heavy vehicle loading trailer towing and or high outside temperatures the fan speed increases when the clutch engages So you may hear an increase in fan noise This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts It is merely the cooling system functioning properly The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine It will go away as the fan clutch disengages 5 17 If a Tire Goes Flat It s unusual for a tire to blow out while you re driving especially if you maintain your tires properly If air goes out of a tire it s much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do
165. es Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap An Emission Control Service ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 14 Part B Owner Checks and Services Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Part D At Each Fuel Fill It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil in the Index for further details Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant in the Index for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary See Windshield Washer Fluid in the Index for further details At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures Don t forget to check your spare t
166. essing the select button will scroll through the following choices TILT MIRROR OFF default TILT MIRROR PASSENGER e TILT MIRROR DRIVER TILT MIRROR BOTH If you choose off neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R If you choose passenger the passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R If you choose driver the driver s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R If you choose both the driver s and passenger s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE R Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on tilt mirror in reverse see Curb View Assist Mirror in the Index Easy Exit Seat If Equipped Press the personalization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears in the display To select your personalization for seat position exit press the select button while SEAT POSITION EXIT is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices SEAT POSITION EXIT OFF default SEAT POSITION EXIT ON If you choose for the easy exit seat feature to be on the driver s seat will move all of the way rearward when the vehicle is turned off If you choose for this feature to be off no
167. est of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 38 The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that s unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints Restraint Systems for Children An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 39 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the harness and also sometimes with sur
168. ey can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Rear Seat Passenger Positions Lap Shoulder Belt When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender at the end of this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to All three rear seating positions have lap shoulder belts Here s how to wear one properly 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Don t let it get twisted 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 3 To make the lap part tight pull down on the buckle Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part 1 31 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move N f forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body E EA 7 4 Ai ON i h Cy N yy a KC Hie YS G p x ib aa a The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And yov d be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you sli
169. faces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1 40 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Q How do child restraints work A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the vehicle s owner For many years add on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle To help reduce the chance of injury the child also has to be secured within the restraint The vehicle s belt system secures the add on child restraint in the vehicle and the add on child restraint s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoulder straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached
170. ff once the ignition key is in LOCK 2 40 Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on the exterior lamps knob is in automatic headlamp mode the light sensor detects daytime light and the transmission is not in PARK P When the DRL are on only your headlamps will be on The taillamps sidemarker and other lamps won t be on The instrument panel won t be lit up either When it begins to get dark the headlamps will automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps To idle your vehicle with the DRL off put your vehicle s transmission in PARK P The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK P The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada When necessary you may turn off the automatic headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps DRL feature by following the steps below 1 Turn the ignition to RUN 2 Press the dome override button four times within six seconds After the fourth press of the button a chime will sound informing you t
171. freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable following distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circumstances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you re ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you re not fresh such as after a day s wo
172. from the display until another new message is received 3 26 TRAF Press this button to receive traffic announcements The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements the radio will seek to a station that does When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements it will stop If no station is found NONE FOUND will appear on the display When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station you will hear it even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing If the compact disc player was being used the compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped Playing a Compact Disc LOAD CD Press this button to load CDs into the compact disc player This compact disc player will accommodate up to six discs To insert one disc do the following 1 Turn the ignition on 2 Press and release the LOAD CD button 3 Wait for the light located to the right of the slot to turn green 4 Load a disc Insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull the disc in When the disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an EQ setting for your disc it will be activated each time you play a disc If the radio is on or off the dis
173. g or reaching for something on the floor makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do things like this or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It s the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years about 16 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300 000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it s against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if the driver plans t
174. g from a container to clean your vehicle be sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings and instructions And always open your doors or windows when you re cleaning the inside Never use these to clean your vehicle Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous some more than others and they can all damage your vehicle too Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can In many uses these will damage your vehicle e Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach e Reducing Agents Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt Wipe vinyl leather plastic and painted surfaces with a clean damp cloth Cleaning of Fabric Carpet Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and carpet They will clean normal spots and stains very well You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Here are some cleaning tips Always read the instructions on the cleaner label Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set Carefully scrape off any excess stain Use a clean cloth or sponge and change to a clean area often A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately or it will set Using Clea
175. g your wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that doesn t get you out after a few tries you may need to be towed out If you do need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle This section begins with service and fuel information and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels There is also technical information about your vehicle and a part devoted to its appearance care 6 2 Service 6 29 6 3 Fuel 6 33 6 5 Fuels in Foreign Countries 6 34 6 6 Filling Your Tank 6 35 6 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 6 38 6 8 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 46 6 11 Engine Oil 6 47 6 16 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 49 6 18 Automatic Transmission Fluid 6 50 6 21 Rear Axle 6 54 6 21 All Wheel Drive 6 55 6 23 Engine Coolant 6 56 6 26 Radiator Pressure Cap 6 63 6 27 Power Steering Fluid 6 63 6 28 Windshield Washer Fluid 6 63 Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Vehicle Identification Number VIN Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best
176. h counterclockwise three or four turns 4 Repeat this procedure at least two times If the spare tire lowers to the ground continue with Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools earlier in this section 5 Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 6 Attach the jack handle extension and the wheel wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare 5 23 10 Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand If the spare tire is hanging from the cable insert the
177. h the horn symbol on the key transmitter is pressed the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again or by waiting for 30 seconds or by starting the vehicle 2 11 Matching Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle any remaining transmitters must also be matched Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it 2 12 Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won t work at the normal range in any location If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works it s probably time to change the battery The Driver Information Center DIC will display a RFA BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter battery is low NOTICE When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces
178. h water You don t need to add water to the ACDelco battery installed in every new GM vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you don t explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Don t get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 5 Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go toa heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Don t connect positive to negative or you ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And don t connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Don t let th
179. hat s true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If Pm a good driver and I never drive far from home why should I wear safety belts A You may be an excellent driver but if you re in an accident even one that isn t your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver doesn t protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle see the part of this manual called Children Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has We ll start with the driver position 1 13 Driver Position This part describes the driver s restraint system Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here s how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1 14 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you
180. hat the system is off 3 To return to the automatic mode push the dome override button four times within six seconds the chime will sound or turn the ignition to LOCK and then to RUN again As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Fog Lamps Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions Your ignition must be in RUN for your fog lamps to work The fog lamp button is located on the instrument panel to the right of the exterior lamps knob Press the button to turn the fog lamps on Press the button again to turn them off A light will glow near the button when the fog lamps are on Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlamps come on When the high beams go off the fog lamps will come on again 2 41 Interior Lamps Brightness Control 2 42 Press the knob located next to the exterior lamps knob to extend and turn it to make your instrument panel lights brighter Turn the knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps Press the knob back into its stored position Dome Lamp Override You can use the dome override button located below the exterior lamps knob to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened or to remain off To turn the lamps off press the button The dome lamps will remain off when a door is open To return the lamps to automatic operation press the button again The dome
181. have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s air bag or both the air bag module and seatback for the driver s and right front passenger s side impact air bag Do not open or break the air bag coverings 1 29 Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the air bag systems in several places around your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems To purchase a service manual see Service and Owner Publications in the Index For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected an air bag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the air bag systems Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance 1 30 Rear Seat Passengers It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And th
182. he disc is ejected remove the disc After removing the disc press the VOLUME PWR control off and then on again This will clear the disc sensing feature and enable discs to be loaded into the player again KREV Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time FWD Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track Release it to play the passage You will hear sound at a reduced volume The display will show elapsed time RPT With repeat you can repeat one track or an entire disc To use repeat do the following To repeat the track you are listening to press and release the RPT button RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn it off To repeat the disc you are listening to press and hold the RPT button for two seconds RPT will appear on the display Press RPT again to turn if off RDM With random you can listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order on all of the discs or on one disc To use random do the following Press and release the RDM button to play the tracks on all of the discs that are loaded in random order RDM will appear on the display Press RDM to turn it off To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in random order press and hold RDM for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and RDM will appear on the display Pres
183. he lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the four programming options listed above and press the unlock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the unlocking options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Rear Door Security Locks With this feature you can lock the rear doors so they can t be opened from the inside by passengers To use one of these locks do the following 1 Open one of the rear doors 2 You will find a security lock lever located on the inside edge of each rear door Move the lever down to engage the safety lock Move the lever up to disengage the safety lock 3 Close the door 4 Do the same thing to the other rear door The rear do
184. hen you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it s just a seat on wheels Put someone on it Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider doesn t stop The person keeps going until stopped by something or the instrument panel In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That s why safety belts make such good sense 1 12 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts and the Answers Q A Won t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I m wearing a safety belt You could be whether you re wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you re upside down And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted If my vehicle has air bags why should I have to wear safety belts Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future But they are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you re in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection T
185. hicle If you choose horn the horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 2 89 Headlamps on at Exit Press the personalization button until HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT appears in the display To select your personalization for how long the headlamps will stay on when you turn off the vehicle press the select button while HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices HEADLAMP DELAY 10 SEC default HEADLAMP DELAY 20 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 40 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 60 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 120 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY 180 SEC HEADLAMP DELAY OFF The amount of time you choose will be the amount of time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off the vehicle If you choose off the headlamps will turn off as soon as you turn off the vehicle Choose one of the seven options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 2 90 Tilt Mirror in Reverse If Equipped Press the personalization button until TILT MIRROR IN REVERSE appears in the display To select your personalization for tilt mirror in reverse press the select button while TILT MIRROR IN REVERSE is displayed on the DIC Pr
186. hicle as shown in the following chart PREFERRED COLD WEATHER DO NOT USE SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6 13 As in the chart shown previously SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle However you can use SAE 10W 30 if it s going to be 0 F 18 C or above These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 NOTICE Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty GM Goodwrench oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle If you are in an area where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures 6 14 Engine Oil Additives Don t add anything to your oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil This is not based on mileage but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing the GM Oil Life System will indicate that a change is necessary The mile
187. hill If this happens there are some things you should do and there are some things you must not do First here s what you should do Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards Also apply the parking brake e If your engine is still running shift the transmission to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE R If your engine has stopped running you ll need to restart it With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied shift the transmission to PARK P and restart the engine Then shift to REVERSE R release the parking brake and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE R As you are backing down the hill put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o clock position This way you ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down It s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover Here are some things you must not do if you stall or are about to stall when going up a hill Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL N to rev up the engine and regain forward momentum This won t work Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control Instead apply the r
188. ht and the player can t turn the tape hubs Remove the tape Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil Turn the tape over and repeat If the hubs do not turn easily your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly Broken Tape is displayed when the tape is broken Try anew tape Wrapped is displayed when the tape is wrapped around the tape head Attempt to get the cassette out Try anew tape 3 18 If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Clean Playr This message may also appear on the radio display to indicate that the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned It will still play tapes but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player For additional information see Care of Your Cassette Tape Player in the Index Playing a Compact Disc With the ignition on insert a disc partway into the slot label side up The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off first press the eject upward pointing triangle button or the TUNE RCL P TYPE control When the disc is inserted the CD symbol will be displayed If you select an E
189. ht flashing but if it is you should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a snow plow NOTICE Adding a snow plow or similar equipment to your vehicle can damage it and the repairs wouldn t be covered by warranty Do not install a snow plow or similar equipment on your vehicle 4 47 Towing a Trailer If you don t use the correct equipment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle NOTICE Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this part and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle 4 48 To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section If yours was built with trailering options as many are it s ready for heavier trailers But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means
190. humidify the air inside the vehicle Also while in this mode the system will maximize its performance by using recirculation as necessary On cool but sunny days use the bi level mode to deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets To warm or cool the air delivered turn the temperature control to the desired setting Heating Press AUTO and adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob clockwise or counterclockwise You may also adjust the automatic system manually by pressing the MODE button and selecting floor Again adjust the temperature by turning the temperature knob clockwise or counterclockwise Outside air will be heated and sent through the floor outlets The heater works best if you keep the windows closed while using it Defogging and Defrosting On cool humid days use defog to keep the windshield and side windows clear Use the FRONT defrost button to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions If you select FRONT defrost or defog from AUTO the system will control the fan speed Adjust the temperature and fan speed to your comfort level After the windshield is clear adjust the temperature to your normal setting and press the AUTO button to return to AUTO mode and fan control For maximum front defrost performance under extreme icing or frosting conditions increase the temperature setting to 90 F 32 C and increase the fan
191. icle was turned off The display will update after the vehicle has been moving for a few minutes and the sensor has a chance to cool down to the actual temperature To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on engine coolant temperature Pressing the fan switch will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed Use the mode button to cycle through the following four air delivery modes ao A Panel This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets ao v4 Bi Level This setting will deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets e y Floor This setting will deliver air to the floor outlets We Ye Defog This setting will deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets OFF Press this button to turn the system off Some fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle from the floor outlets The system will try to maintain the previously chosen temperature setting c Recirculation Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the vehicle If you select recirculat
192. ide a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Don t smoke while pumping gasoline Checking Things Under the Hood Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine Hood Release To open the hood first pull the handle located inside the vehicle on the lower driver s side of the instrument panel Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release Lift the hood release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood There may be a lamp that comes on when you open the hood When you lift the hood you ll see the following Z lt reanarrrTanmtmoeadw gt Coolant Recovery Tank Engine Air Cleaner Filter Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir Engine Air Cleaner Filter Indicator Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Automatic Transmission Dipstick Engine Oil Dipstick Radiator Pressure Cap Engine Oil Fill Cap Front Engine Lift Bracket Marked GND Brake Master Cylinder Battery Engine Co
193. ike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Don t leave a seat folded down unless you need to There s also important loading information for off road driving in this manual See Loading Your Vehicle for Off Road Driving in the Index 4 46 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled air suspension system that automatically keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload The system includes a compressor two height sensors and two air springs supporting the rear axle The system also has an internal clock to prevent overheating If the system overheats all leveling function stops until the system cools down During this time the indicator light on the air inflator system will be flashing The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate in order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after loading The system can lower the vehicle to the standard ride height after unloading with the ignition on and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has been turned off You may hear the com
194. ill still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has anti lock brakes ABS ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start your engine and begin to drive away your anti lock brake system will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on This is normal If there s a problem with the anti lock brake system this warning light will stay on See Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in the Index Here s how anti lock works Let s say the road is wet You re driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here s what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard As you brake your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember Anti lock doesn
195. illing Your Tank in the Index The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel See Fuel in the Index Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed 2 75 Emissions Inspection and Mainte
196. in one of two ways e Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required 2 74 If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades e If you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap See F
197. inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system These can be harmful Checking Coolant Adding Coolant The engine coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL recovery tank is in the coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more Turning the radiator pressure cap when the information on location engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly With the coolant recovery tank you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a The vehicle must be on a level surface When your little when the engine and radiator are hot engine is cold the coolant level should be at FULL COLD or a little higher When your engine is warm the level should be at the base of the filler neck or a Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank but be careful little higher not to spill it 6 25 You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Don t spill coolant on a hot engine Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator For information on how to add coolant to the radiator see Cooling System in the Index 6 26 Radiator Pressure Cap NOTICE Your radiator cap i
198. inish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed accelerated corrosion rust can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ringlet shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this Oldsmobile will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs fi
199. interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote keyless entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary See the instructions that follow If you re still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for service Operation J Unlock When you press unlock the driver s door will unlock automatically the parking lamps may flash and the interior lights will go on You can program different feedback settings through the Driver Information Center DIC For more information see Driver Information Center DIC in the Index a Lock Press lock to lock all the doors Press lock again within three seconds and the horn may chirp ly 2 Panic When the button wit
200. ion while in defrost defog or floor the light on the button will flash and go out to let you know this is not allowed This is to prevent fogging When the weather is cool or damp operating the system in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle s windows To clear the fog select either defog or FRONT defrost Be sure A C OFF is not selected to allow the air conditioning compressor to run automatically and help dehumidify the air Re Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode the system will run the air conditioning automatically to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle If you select A C OFF while in FRONT defrost the A C OFF text will flash to let you know this is not allowed This is to prevent fogging Kay FRONT Defrost Press this button to defrost the windshield The system will automatically control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO If the outside temperature is 40 F 4 C or warmer your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best By pressing the AUTO button the system will cool and de
201. ire See Tires in the Index for further details Cassette Deck Service Clean cassette deck Cleaning should be done every 50 hours of tape play See Audio Systems in the Index for further details 7 15 At Least Twice a Year Restraint System Check Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The air bag system does not need regular maintenance Wiper Blade Check Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Also see Wiper Blades Cleaning in the Index 7 16 Spare Tire Check At least twice a year after the monthly inflation check of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to the correct tire inflation pressure make sure that the spare tire is stored securely Push pull and then try to rotate or turn the tire If it moves use the wheel wrench ratchet to tighten the cable See Storing the Spare Tire and Tools in the Index Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check Your vehicle has an indicator loca
202. is could overheat and damage the transmission Use your brakes or shift into PARK P to hold your vehicle in position on a hill 2 24 Shift Lock Release This vehicle is equipped with a shift lock release system If your vehicle has a dead battery and you need to have your vehicle towed there is a shift lock release lever that will allow you to move the shift lever out of PARK P To access the shift lock release lever do the following 1 Press on the sides of the boot around the shift lever to release the boot 2 Lift up the boot on the shift lever and you will see an orange lever 3 Press the orange lever down and move the shift lever out of PARK P 4 Snap the shift lever boot back in place Parking Brake To set the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot while pressing the button on the end of the lever and pulling the parking brake lever on the center console up If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the regular brake pedal down Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the button in at the end of the lever Hold the button in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down NOTICE Driving with the parking brake on can cause your parking brakes to overheat You may have to replace them and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle If you are towing a trailer and you must
203. isten to each selection for a few seconds The disc will go to the next selection stop for a few seconds then go on to the next selection Press this button again to stop scanning The sound will mute while scanning SCAN and the track number will appear on the display TUNE RCL P TYPE Press this control to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the display track or elapsed time press the control until you see the display you want then hold the control until the display flashes While elapsed time is showing CD TIME will appear on the display AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player TP CD With a cassette tape in the player and the radio playing press this button to play a cassette tape Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape is playing Press TP CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening The display will show TAPE and CD icons 3 19 amp Eject Press this button to remove the disc The radio will play Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Compact Disc Messages Check CD If this message appears on the radio display and the disc comes out it could be one of the following The road is too rough The disc shou
204. it will be ready to warn you if there s a problem Brake System Warning Light y gle If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the When the ignition is on the brake system warning light road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is will come on when you set your parking brake The light harder to push Or the pedal may go closer to the floor will stay on if your parking brake doesn t release fully It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle in it means you have a brake problem the Index Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part isn t working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the warning light comes on there could be a brake Your brake system may not be working properly problem Have your brake system inspected right away if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you ve 1 P pulled off the road and stopped carefully have 1 the vehicle towed for service BRAKE United States Canada 2 71 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light If the light stays on or comes on when you re driving your vehicle needs service If the regular brake system war
205. ith the eject symbol on it or the TUNE RCL P TYPE knob If an error appears on the radio display the tape won t play because of an error See Cassette Tape Messages later in this section 1 REV Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly Press it again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses You may select stations during reverse operation by using the TUNE RCL P TYPE control 2 FWD Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape Press the button again to return to playing speed The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances You may select stations during forward operation by using the TUNE RCL P TYPE control 3 DU Press this button to reduce background noise DOLBY ON will appear on the display with the Dolby icon Press it again to turn Dolby off Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation 5 SIDE Press this button to play the other side of the tape AUTO EQ Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a cassette tape The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a cassette tape lt SEEK SCAN gt To seek press the right or left pointing arrow briefly to search for the next or previous selection on the tape You
206. iving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier is locked and cargo is still securely fastened eee eeu o Pull open the lid on the front ashtray door NOTICE NOTICE Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating If you do it won t be able to back away from the heating element when it s ready That can make it overload damaging the lighter and the heating element Don t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray If you do cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing damage Sun Visors To remove the front ashtray pull the bin out of the console cupholder You can move down your visor to block out glare n You can also move the visor from side to side To use the lighter press it in all the way and let go When it s ready it will pop back out by itself Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps 2 53 Accessory Inflator Your vehicle is equipped with an air inflator system You can inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires Also you can use it to bring your tire pressure up to the proper pressure It is not designed to inflate large objects which will require more than five minutes to inflate such as an air mattress The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle behind an access cover To remove the cove
207. jack handle extension and wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in the bumper on an angle and turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way 5 24 11 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle 12 If the cable is hanging under the vehicle turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced To continue changing the flat tire return to Step 2 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools earlier in this section Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 Using the wheel wrench loosen all the wheel nuts Don t remove them yet 2 Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to raise the jack lift head 3 Place the handle extension and wheel wrench onto the jack Rear A Frame D Extension B Jack E Wheel Wrench C Handle 5 25 4 Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest the flat tire A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack impr
208. kers in the Index See your dealer for service In an emergency call the GM Roadside Assistance Center See Roadside Assistance in the Index 2 17 New Vehicle Break In Ignition Positions NOTICE Your vehicle doesn t need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Keep your speed at 55 mph 88 km h or less for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Don t make full throttle starts Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time your new brake linings aren t yet broken Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four in Hard stops with new linings can mean different positions premature wear and earlier replacement i a sas A Lock This position locks the ignition and Follow this breaking in guideline every transmission It s a theft deterrent feature You will time you get new brake linings i only be able to remove the key when the ignition is Don t tow a trailer during break in turned to LOCK See Towing a Trailer in the Index for more information 2 18 NOTICE If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t turn it be sure you are using the correct key if so is it all the way in Turn the key only with your hand Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch If none of this w
209. king brake set try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The key should come out only in LOCK Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission PARK P Mechanism Check When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect 7 19 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year for instance each spring and fall Y
210. l information regarding the SECURITY light 2 78 Cruise Control Light CRUISE United States Canada The CRUISE light appears whenever you set your cruise control See Cruise Control in the Index Reduced Engine Power Light REDUCED ENGINE 4 POWER United States Canada This light is displayed when a noticeable reduction in the vehicle s performance may occur The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced The performance may be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle If this light stays on see your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair This light may also come on if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If this happens take the vehicle in for service as soon as possible Service AWD Light SERVICE AWD ne United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition as a check to show you it is working The SERVICE AWD light comes on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction 2 79 Check Gages Light GAGES CHECK YL United States Canada The CHECK G
211. l opening Pull the tire out from under the vehicle NOTICE To help avoid vehicle damage do not drive the vehicle before the cable is properly stored 3 Put the spare tire near the flat tire gl 4 Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the notch of the center cap and pry off the center cap See Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire later in this section to continue changing the flat tire 5 21 Secondary Latch System The spare tire hoist assembly is equipped with a secondary latch system It s designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle For the secondary latch to work the spare tire must be stored with the valve stem pointing up See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in the Index for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed below 5 22 To release the spare tire from the secondary latch do the following 1 Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible 2 If it is not visible proceed to Step 6 If visible first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice You cannot overtighten the cable 3 Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrenc
212. lamps will come on when you open a door This will override the illuminated entry feature unless you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle Press the dome lamp override button four times to override the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps DRL Illuminated Entry Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature When a door is opened the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the out position When all the doors are closed the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then turn off automatically If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle the interior lights will come on for a short time whether or not the dome override is on Exit Lighting With exit lighting the interior lamps will come on when you remove the key from the ignition to help you see while exiting the vehicle With the dome override button in the out position these lights will stay on for a short period of time and then will go out Reading Lamps Press the lens on the lamp located above the doors to turn the reading lamps on and off Dome Lamps The dome lamps will come on when you open a door You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel located next to the exterior lamps knob all the way up to the second notch In this position the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off 2 43 Battery Run Down Protection Thi
213. lance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free ACDelco battery When it s time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco battery See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for battery location WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you aren t careful See Jump Starting in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods Also for your audio system see Theft Deterrent Feature in the Index 6 33 Bulb Replacement For the type of bulbs see Replacement Bulbs in the Index For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Taillamps
214. ld play when the road is smoother The disc is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can t be corrected please contact your dealer If your radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 20 AM FM Stereo with 6 Disc Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio Data System RDS If Equipped Standard radio Bose not shown Playing the Radio VOLUME PWR Press this control to turn the system on and off To increase volume turn the control clockwise Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume AUTO VOL Your system has a feature called automatic volume With this feature your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED MAX or OFF Each choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive automatic volume automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use automatic volume select OFF If your vehicle has the Bose radio your audio system monitors the noise inside your vehicle Then automatically adjusts the volume so that it always sounds the same to
215. le and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in PARK P or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake If you have a four wheel drive vehicle be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL N NOTICE If you leave your radio on it could be badly damaged The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets if equipped Turn off the radio and all lamps that aren t needed This will avoid sparks and help to save both batteries And it could save your radio Open both hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminals on each battery Your vehicle has a remote negative jump starting terminal You should always use this remote terminal instead of the terminal on the battery The remote negative terminal is located on the front engine lift bracket and is marked GND See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enoug
216. le materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle s exhaust system 4 18 Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip especially when going to a remote area Know the terrain and plan your route You are much less likely to get bad surprises Get accurate maps of trails and terrain Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads It s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle If something happens to one of them the other can help quickly Getting Familiar with Off Road Driving It s a good idea to practice in an area that s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness Off road driving does require some new and different driving skills Here s what we mean Tune your senses to different kinds of signals Your eyes for example need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds With your arms hands feet and body you need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off road driving One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed Here are some things to keep in mind At higher speeds you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles you have less time to react you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles you ll need more distance for braking es
217. lectronically Controlled Air Suspension System in the Index Inflating something too much can make it explode and you or others could be injured Be sure to read the inflator instructions and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure Accessory Power Outlets With the accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio Your vehicle has three accessory power outlets The first outlet is located to the right of the cigarette lighter on the instrument panel The second outlet is located on the rear of the center console and the third one is located in the rear of the vehicle near the liftgate Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the accessory power outlet Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets 2 55 NOTICE Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle can damage it or keep other things from working as they should This wouldn t be covered by your warranty Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment and never use anything that exceeds the fuse rating When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equip
218. ll performance Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other the alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement NOTICE The wrong wheel can also cause problems
219. loped by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea
220. lose the window almost all the way to preserve the heat Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold But do it as little as possible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device know as a dolly Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of it s wheels on the ground If your vehicle must be towed see Towing Your Vehicle in the Index 4 44 Loading Your Vehicle GAWR FRT a RIM COLD TIRE PRESSURE Co E C The Certification Tire label is found on the driver s door edge above the door latch The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and trailer tongue weight if pulling a trailer The Certification Tire label also tells you the ma
221. ls you may want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down Of course applying the brake takes you out of cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to turn off the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Move the cruise switch to off or Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL N Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition your cruise control set speed memory is erased Exterior Lamps ii ti Your exterior lamps knob is a on the driver s side of your instrument panel 00 Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to manually turn on the following Parking Lamps Sidemarker Lamps e Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights O Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamp symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off your lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will a
222. lso be on Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of the instrument panel Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on The system may also turn on your lights when driving through a parking garage heavy overcast weather or a tunnel This is normal There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay 2 39 To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off set the parking brake while the ignition is off Then start your vehicle The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake or until you shift out of park You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp system See Daytime Running Lamps DRL later in this section for more information As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Lamps On Reminder A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on the driver s door is open and your ignition is in LOCK or ACCESSORY To turn the tone off turn the knob all the way counterclockwise In the automatic mode the headlamps turn o
223. lume SCV With SCV your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive Set the volume at the desired level Press this button to select MIN MED MAX or OFF Each choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Then as you drive SCV automatically increases the volume as necessary to overcome noise at any particular speed The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive If you don t want to use SCV select OFF If your vehicle has the Bose radio your audio system monitors the noise in your vehicle Then SCV automatically adjusts the volume so that it always sounds the same to you To use SCV press the SCV button until SPD COMP ON appears on the display To turn SCV off press the SCV button until SPD COMP OFF appears on the display 3 11 Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE RCL P TYPE Turn this control to select radio stations SEEK SCAN To seek press the right pointing or left pointing arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking To scan press and hold the SEEK SCAN button for two seconds until the SC icon appears on the display and you hear a beep Use scan to listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press the SEEK SCAN button
224. m It could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away Driving while this light is on could drain your battery If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 2 70 Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running but the ignition is on in RUN this gage shows your battery s state of charge in DC volts When the engine is running the gage shows the condition of the charging system Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle As engine speeds are increased this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone If you must drive turn off all unnecessary accessories Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible This light should come on briefly when you turn the problem in the electrical system Have the vehicle ignition key to RUN If it doesn t come on then serviced as soon as possible have it fixed so
225. may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry Liftgate Liftglass transmitter do the following It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You can t see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate or liftglass open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your heating or cooling 1 Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers of the system to its highest speed with the setting transmitter housing Gently pry the transmitter apart on panel or bi level with recirculation off 2 Remove and replace the battery with a three volt That will force outside air into your vehicle CR2032 or equivalent battery positive side down See Comfort Controls in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the 3 Align the covers and snap them together instrument panel open them all the way 4 Check the operation of the transmitter See Engine Exhaust in the Index 2 13 Liftgate Release To unlock the liftgate you may use the power door locks or the keyless entry system described earlier On some vehicles the liftglass will also unlock when the liftgate is unlocked Use the pushbutton on the liftglass
226. ment NOTICE Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 2 56 OnStar System If Equipped OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a variety of services and provides a hands free communication link between you and the OnStar Center A service subscription agreement and fee are required in order to receive OnStar service Services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For more information call 1 888 ONSTAR 7 1 888 667 8277 OnStar Services Button Press this button once to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with these services If you are not quickly connected the system will automatically reset and redial This ensures connection to the center there is no additional action required Press the Call Answer End button to cancel the automatic redial Emergency Button In an emergency situation press the emergency service button Upon receiving the call an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and assess the situation If necessary the advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider Call ANSWER END Button Use this button to answer a call If you are receiving a call the audio system will mute and the ring will be heard Press this button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the au
227. mer Assistance Center P O Box 33171 Detroit MI 48232 5171 1 800 442 6537 1 800 833 6537 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 442 OLDS 6537 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Fax Number 313 381 0022 Canada General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 All Overseas Locations Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle hand controls wheelchair scooter lifts etc This program can also provide you with free resource information such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of v
228. middle position balances the sound between the speakers To set the balance and fade to the middle position select balance or fade and press and hold the AUDIO control The radio will beep once and will set the display level to the middle position To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press and hold the AUDIO control when tone or speaker controls are not active The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display 3 24 Using RDS Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data System RDS RDS mode gives you many useful new features With RDS the radio can do the following Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens please contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station
229. mpact Discs Compact Disc Player with Programmable 3 37 Care of Your Compact Disc Player Equalization and Radio Data System RDS 3 37 Diversity Antenna System 3 37 Chime Level Adjustment Comfort Controls This section tells you how to make your air systems work for you With these systems you can control the heating cooling and ventilation in your vehicle Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section Comfort Controls Personalization If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with memory seats and mirrors you can store and recall the climate control settings for temperature air delivery mode and fan speed for two different drivers The personal choice settings recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed the climate control will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver s door When adjustments are made the new settings are automatically saved for that driver Automatic Dual Zone Comfort Control System a F ga iia w f Lars en es eo er With this system you can select different comfort control settings for the driver and passengers Driver s Side Temperature Knob The driver s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
230. mpartment Fuse Block Before closing the hood be sure all filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from its slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then pull the hood down firmly to close It will latch when dropped from 6 to 8 inches 15 to 20 cm without pressing on the hood Engine Oil If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the instrument cluster it means you need to check your engine oil level right away For more information see Check Oil Level Message in the Index You should check your engine oil level regularly this is an added reminder Checking Engine Oil It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow ring located in the engine compartment toward the passenger s side of the 4 vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location 6 11 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you don t the oil dipstick NOTICE might not show the actual level Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or Don t add too much oil If your engine has cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again so much oil that the oil level gets above the keeping the tip down and
231. n See footnote 22 500 Miles 37 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY 7 9 Scheduled Maintenance 30 000 Miles 50 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 37 500 Miles 62 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 45 000 Miles 75 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote
232. n TPC Spec number on each tire s sidewall When you get new tires get ones with that same TPC Spec number That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance handling speed rating traction ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle If your tires have an all season tread design the TPC number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type bias bias belted or radial as your original tires 6 42 Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system deve
233. n the map 2 46 Press and hold the on off button for six seconds Release the button when ZONE is displayed The number shown is the current zone number Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the compass temperature window on the mirror by pressing the on off button Once you find your zone number release the button After about four seconds the mirror will return to the compass and temperature display and the new zone number will be set Outside Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so you can see a little of the side of your vehicle Fold the outside mirrors in when entering a car wash To do this pull the mirrors in toward the vehicle Push the mirrors back out when finished Power Remote Control Mirror This control is located on the driver s door Turn the control to the left or right to choose the mirror then press the control to move the mirror in the direction that you want the mirror to go To secure the mirror settings turn the knob back to the center position Convex Outside Mirror A convex mirror s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver s seat A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane you could hit a vehicle Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors When you operate the rear window def
234. nance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection 2 76 Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi pounds per square inch when the engine is running Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa kilopascals Oil pressure may vary with engine speed outside temperature and oil viscosity but readings above the low pressu
235. ne accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote 67 500 Miles 112 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 75 000 Miles 125 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 7 12 DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY Scheduled Maintenance 82 500 Miles 137 500 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information See footnote 90 000 Miles 150 000 km Check rear front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking Replace fuel filter An Emission Control Service See footnote Rotate tires See Tire Inspection
236. needs these services to retain its safety dependability and emission control performance 7 2 Introduction 7 20 Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections 7 4 Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services 7 22 Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 5 Scheduled Maintenance 7 24 Part E Maintenance Record 7 15 Part B Owner Checks and Services IMPORTANT KEEP ENGINE OIL AT THE PROPER LEVEL AND CHANGE AS RECOMMENDED Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details 7 2 Introduction Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance procedures are important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our environment and to keep your vehicle in good condition please maintain your vehicle properly Maintenance Requirements Maintenance intervals checks inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty How This Section is O
237. ner on Fabric 1 2 Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt Always clean a whole trim panel or section Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines 3 Follow the directions on the container label Apply cleaner with a clean sponge Don t saturate the material and don t rub it roughly As soon as you ve cleaned the section use a sponge to remove any excess cleaner Wipe cleaned area with a clean water dampened towel or cloth Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry 6 47 Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup coffee black egg fruit fruit juice milk soft drinks vomit urine and blood can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain then sponge the soiled area with cool water 2 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 3 If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine treat the area with a water baking soda solution 1 teaspoon 5 ml of baking soda to 1 cup 250 ml of lukewarm water 4 Let dry Stains caused by candy ice cream mayonnaise chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows 1 Carefully scrape off excess stain 2 First clean with cool water and allow to dry completely 3 Ifa stain remains follow the cleaner instructions described earlier 6 48 Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth Rub with a clean damp cloth to remove dirt You may have to do i
238. next gear and have more power DRIVE D should not be used when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or for off road driving Select THIRD 3 when operating the vehicle under any of these conditions THIRD 3 This position is also used for normal driving however it offers more power but lower fuel economy than DRIVE D You should use THIRD 3 when towing a trailer carrying a heavy load driving on steep hills or winding roads or for off road driving SECOND 2 This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD 3 You can use SECOND 2 on hills It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on You can also use SECOND 2 for starting your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces 2 23 FIRST 1 This position gives you even more power but lower fuel economy than SECOND 2 You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the selector lever is put in FIRST 1 while the vehicle is moving forward the transmission won t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough NOTICE If your wheels can t rotate don t try to drive This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object You could damage your transmission Also if you stop when going uphill don t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal Th
239. nformation Center DIC Windows Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous A child can be overcome by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Power Windows The controls for the power windows are located on the armrest on each of the side doors With power windows the switches operate the windows when the ignition is in RUN ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power RAP is active See Retained Accessory Power in the Index The driver s door has a switch for each of the passenger s windows as well Press the bottom of the switch to lower the window Press the top of the switch to raise the window Express Down Window The driver s and front passenger s window switches have an express down feature that allows you to lower the window without holding the switch down Press the bottom of the driver s window switch down briefly to activate the express down feature Lightly tap the switch to open the window slightly The express down feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top of the switch Lockout Switch Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent passengers from operating the power windows A small light in the lockout switch will come on to show that the switch has been activated Press the lockout switch again to return
240. nformation on location 1 Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 2 Push it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again 3 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place 6 20 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot A cold check is used only as a reference If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check It doesn t take much fluid generally less than one pint 0 5 L Don t overfill NOTICE We recommend you use only fluid labeled DEXRON 1 because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check When the correct fluid level is obtained push the dipstick back in all the way then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Mai
241. ng labels on your vehicle They use the same words CAUTION or NOTICE Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle may be equipped with components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gage or indicator reference the following topics in the index Engine Compartment Overview e Instrument Panel Comfort Controls e Audio Systems Also see Warning Lights and Gages in the Index Here are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle ix These symbols These symbols are important These symbols These symbols Here are some are used on an for you and your passengers have to do with are used on other symbols original battery whenever your vehicle is driven vehicle lamps warning and you may see indicator lights LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS TO tie O LIGHTING PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 SWITCH MAAS ENGINE FUSE DO NOT TWIST SAFETY l COOLANT BOX TU BELT WHEN ATTACHING TEMP ACCESS ee TURN ory FASTEN SIGNALS BATTERY VENTILATING SEAT AIR BAG IN CHARGING BELTS SYSTEM CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING PARKING p CAUSTIC MOVE SEAT DO NOT INSTALL uams SN SECURE HAZARD CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT OWNER S
242. ngine running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you ve moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pressing the button on the console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift your transmission into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how see Shifting Into PARK P in the Index When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P 2 27 Shifting Out of PARK P Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN See Automatic Transmission Operation in the
243. ning with Step 1 to re enter the programming mode You can exit the program mode any time by turning the ignition to RUN the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you are leaving the program mode If the lock unlock switches are not pressed while in the programming mode the current auto lock unlock setting will not be modified See your dealer for more information Programmable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options Mode 1 Driver s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Mode 2 All doors unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK P Mode 3 All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition Mode 4 No automatic door unlock The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to unlock the driver s door once the transmission is shifted to PARK P The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the four programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode you need to do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Tur the key to RUN and LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear t
244. ning light isn t on you still have brakes but you don t have anti lock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with your regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light earlier in this section With the anti lock brake system this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds That s normal The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light doesn t come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem 2 72 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area the engine coolant has overheated If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating in the Index Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light in the United NOTICE States or Check Engine Light in Canada If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after a while your emission controls may not work as well your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty SERVICE ENGINE SOON Uni
245. nt If you change your own oil be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal Don t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help 6 15 Engine Air Cleaner Filter The engine air cleaner filter is located toward the front of the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on engine air cleaner filter location 6 16 The engine air cleaner filter assembly has an indicator that lets you know when the air filter is dirty and needs to be serviced The indicator is located on the engine air cleaner filter air duct See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on engine air cleaner filter indicator location The service window A with the percentage scale shows the amount of engine air cleaner filter life used When both service window A and service window B turn orange replace the engine air cleaner filter After changing the engine air cleaner filter press the button on top of the indicator to reset it See Owner Checks and Services in the Index to determine when to check the indicator To r
246. ntenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant le To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface The proper level is from 0 to 3 8 inch 0 to 10 mm below the bottom of the filler plug hole What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index All Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles However there are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index 6 21 How to Check Lubricant b To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole Use care not to overtighten the plug What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 22 Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance Services in the Index How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate
247. o choose a non scrubbing action wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner The use of a non scrubbing action dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended After you clean the player press and hold the eject upward pointing triangle button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYR indicator The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust If the surface of a disc is soiled dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution and clean it wiping from the center to the edge Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling discs Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism Diversity Antenna System Your AM FM antennas are located in the rear side windows B
248. o drive It s a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Association a 180 Ib 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of a liquor like whiskey gin or vodka It s the amount of alcohol that counts For example if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks The law in an increasing number of U S states and thr
249. o the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a better time Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it s all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic 4 14 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you re awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you re following a larger vehicle Also you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t get too close Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take
250. obstacles or rough terrain keep a firm grip on the steering wheel Ruts troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you re not prepared When you drive over bumps rocks or other obstacles your wheels can leave the ground If this happens even with one or two wheels you can t control the vehicle as well or at all Because you will be on an unpaved surface it s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration sudden turns or sudden braking In a way off road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways There are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn t Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road And this is certainly true for off road driving At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills your reflexes perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You could have a serious or even fatal accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking See Drunken Driving in the Index 4 20 Driving on Off Road Hills Off road driving often takes you up down or across a hill Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can t do There are some hills that simply can t be driven no matter how well built the vehicle Man
251. ogger a defogger also warms the heated driver s and passenger s outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of ice snow and condensation See Rear Window Defogger in the Index for more information 2 47 Electrochromic Rearview Outside Mirror with Curb View Assist If Equipped If your vehicle has this feature the driver s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of the headlamps behind you See Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror with Compass and OnStar earlier in this section If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors it will also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror function This feature will cause the passenger s and or driver s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE R This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R and a short delay has occurred the passenger s and or driver s mirror will return to its original position To change the preselected tilt position adjust the mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in REVERSE R When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE R this new position is saved in memory as the tilt position This feature can be enabled disabled through the Driver Information Center See Personalization Features in the Index for more information 2 48 Storage Compartments Glove Box To open
252. old the switch at resume accelerate the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake So unless you want to go faster don t hold the switch at resume accelerate 2 37 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed Press the button at the end of the lever then release the button and the accelerator pedal You ll now cruise at the higher speed Move the cruise switch from on to resume accelerate Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want and then release the switch To increase your speed in very small amounts move the switch briefly to resume accelerate Each time you do this your vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Press in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want then release it To slow down in very small amounts briefly press the set button Each time you do this you ll go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier 2 38 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hil
253. oling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year Transfer Case and Front Axle All Wheel Drive Inspection Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation Brake System Inspection Inspect the complete system Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking 7 21 Part D Recommended Fluids USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT and Lubricants Hydraulic Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid Fluids and lubricants identified below by name Brake System GM Part No 12377967 or part number or specification may be obtained from equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid TOEA Windshield GM Optikleen Washer Solvent Washer Solvent GM Part No 1051515 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT or equivalent Engine Oil Engine oil with the American Parking Brake Chassis Lubricant Petroleum Institute Certified Cable Guides GM Part No 12377985 or for Gasoline Engines starburst equivalent or lubricant meeting symbol of the proper visc
254. on the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY To use the P TYPE interrupt feature press and hold the P TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt on An asterisk will appear next to the PTY name for example CLASSICAL When you are listening to a cassette or compact disc the last selected RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast Setting PTY Preset Stations The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types PTYs These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets You can set up to 12 PTYs six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Press P TYPE if it is not already on 2 Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2 3 Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY A Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the PTY you set will return 5 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton AM FM The AM FM button operates the alternate frequency feature This feature allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on AF ON will appear on the display The radio may switch to stronger stations Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off AF OFF will appear on the display The radio will not switch to other stations When
255. one Grease Assembly GM Part No 12346293 or Conditioning GM Part No 12345579 Secondary Latch equivalent or lubricant meeting or equivalent Pivots Spring requirements of NLGI 2 Anchor and Category LB or GC LB Weatherstrip Synthetic Oras with Teflon Release Pawl Squeaks Superlube GM Part No 12371287 or equivalent 7 23 Part E Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services or Periodic Maintenance can be added on the following record pages Also you should retain all maintenance receipts Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Maintenance Record ODOMETER DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Here you will find out how to contact Oldsmobile if you need assistance This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure
256. ons The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations You can set up to 18 stations six AM six FM1 and six FM2 by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press AM FM to select the band 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected 5 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that pushbutton 6 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton 3 22 Setting the Tone Bass Treble AUDIO To set the bass press the AUDIO control until BASS appears on the display Turn the control to increase or decrease bass When you use this control the radio s tone setting will switch to custom To set the bass to the middle position select BASS and press and hold the AUDIO control The radio will produce one beep and set the display level to zero To set all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press and hold the AUDIO control when no tone or speaker control is active The radio will produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display To set the midrange press the AUDIO control until MID appears on the display Turn the control to increase or decrease midrange When you use this control the radio s tone setting will swit
257. oor opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter Follow these steps to program up to three channels 1 Decide which one of the three channels one of the HomeLink buttons you want to program 2 Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink through Step 3 3 When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink slowly this may take up to 30 seconds hold the hand held transmitter about to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from HomeLink and then press and hold the transmit button on the hand held transmitter Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly this may take up to 90 seconds If you have trouble programming HomeLink make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand held transmitter is not weak If you still cannot program it move the hand held transmitter to the left or right or forward or backward or flip it upside down HomeLink may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards
258. oper tread depth See Tires in the Index City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You Il save time and energy See the next part Freeway Driving Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light 4 35 Freeway Driving Mile for mile freeways also called thruways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane 4 36 At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the
259. operly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle 5 26 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire 7 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel J Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off causing a serious accident 8 Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface 9 Put the nuts on by hand Make sure the rounded end is toward the wheel Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if you need to to get all the rust or 10 Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against dirt off the hub If a nut can t be turned by hand use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible 5 27 11 Lower the vehicle by turning th
260. orks then your vehicle needs service B Accessory This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off NOTICE Don t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY position for long periods of time Prolonged operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY position could drain the battery and prevent you from starting your vehicle C Run This is the position for driving D Start This position starts the engine Retained Accessory Power RAP Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory Power RAP feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK Your radio power windows sunroof option and overhead console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY Once the key is turned from RUN to LOCK these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK P or NEUTRAL N Your engine won t start in any other position that s a safety feature To restart when you re already moving use NEUTRAL N only NOTICE Don t try to shift to PARK P if your vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to PARK P only when your vehicle is stopped 8 D 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the When starting your engine in very cold weather ignition
261. ors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is on unlock the door and open the door from the outside 2 9 Lockout Prevention This feature stops the power door locks from locking when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition all the doors will lock and the driver s door will unlock Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle take your key open your door and set the locks from inside Then get out and close the door 2 10 Remote Keyless Entry System With this system you can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet 1 m up to 30 feet 9 m away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause
262. osity requirements of NLGI 2 To determine the preferred Category LB or GC LB i ity fe hicle Maule iar SN Power GM Power Steering Fluid Steering System GM Part No 1052884 1 pint 1050017 1 quart or equivalent Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean F drinkable water and use only Automatic DEXRON IJI Automatic GM Goodwrench DEX COOL Transmission Transmission Fluid or Havoline DEX COOL Multi Purpose Lubricant Coolant See Engine Coolant Superlube GM Part in the Index No 12346241 or equivalent engine see Engine Oil in the Index 7 22 USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT USAGE FLUID LUBRICANT Chassis Chassis Lubricant Hood and Multi Purpose Lubricant Lubrication GM Part No 12377985 or Door Hinges Superlube GM Part equivalent or lubricant meeting No 12346241 or equivalent requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Body Door Hinge Multi Purpose Lubricant Pins Liftgate Superlube GM Part Front and SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Hinge and No 12346241 or equivalent Rear Axle Axle Lubricant Linkage Folding GM Part No 12378261 Seats and Fuel or equivalent meeting Door Hinge M ificati 115 sels k a Outer Tailgate Multi Purpose Lubricant Automatic AUTO TRAK II Fluid Handle Pivot Superlube GM Part Transfer Case GM Part No 12378508 Points and Hinges No 12346241 or equivalent 7 F Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Weatherstrip Dielectric Silic
263. ou should let your dealer s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual See Service and Owner Publications in the Index 7 20 Steering Suspension and Front Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear or lack of lubrication Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage tears or leakage Replace seals if necessary Exhaust System Inspection Inspect the complete exhaust system Inspect the body near the exhaust system Look for broken damaged missing or out of position parts as well as open seams holes loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust in the Index Fuel System Inspection Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks Engine Cooling System Inspection Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace as needed Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the co
264. oughout Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 percent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we ve seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision At a BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up I ll be careful isn t the right answer What if there s an emergency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid th
265. our Driving and the Road Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Hazard Warning Flashers J ump Starting Towing Your Vehicle Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads Recreational Vehicle Towing Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer Problems on the Road Engine Overheating Changing a Flat Tire lIfYou re Stuck iv ZO Section 6 Table of Contents cont d Service and Appearance Care Fuel Tires and Wheels Checking Fluids and Lubricants Appearance Care Engine Air Cleaner Filter Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers Brakes Capacities and Specifications Bulb Replacement Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Maintenance Schedule Scheduled Maintenance Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Owner Checks and Services Maintenance Records Periodic Maintenance Inspections Table of Contents cont d Customer Satisfaction Procedures Warranty Information See Warranty M anual Customer Assistance Offices Reporting Safety Defects on page 8 10 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation Service Publications Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem OLDSMOBILE the OLDSMOB
266. our vehicle Keep your maintenance receipts They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services Using Your Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we don t know exactly how you ll drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them If you go to your dealer for your service needs yow ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Part D Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits You will find these limits on your vehicle
267. our vehicle See Comfort Controls in the Index Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you ll want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform and attachments safety chains electrical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when you re towing a trailer And because you re a good deal longer you 1l need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move th
268. over could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver You or others could be injured If you remove the cover always store it outside of the vehicle When you put it back always be sure that it is securely reattached Cargo Tie Downs There are five cargo tie downs in the rear that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle Rear Floor Stowage Lid If the rear floor stowage lid isn t secured properly it can move around in a collision or sudden stop People in the vehicle could be injured Be sure to secure the rear floor stowage lid properly Your vehicle has a rear floor stowage lid located in the rear cargo area that allows you to put items underneath it To remove the rear floor stowage lid do the following 1 Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle 2 Raise the lid slightly to unhook it 3 Pull the lid rearward to release it from the forward mounting tabs To reinstall the rear floor stowage lid reverse the previous steps Make sure the lid is secure by applying slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click 2 51 Luggage Carrier If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control What you are carrying could be violently torn off
269. owing is the list of available programming options Mode 1 All doors lock when the transmission is shifted into gear Mode 2 All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph 13 km h Mode 3 No automatic door locking The automatic door locks were pre programmed at the factory to lock all the doors when the transmission is shifted into gear The following instructions detail how to program your door locks differently than the factory setting Choose one of the three programming options listed above before entering the program mode To enter the program mode you need to do the following 1 Begin with the ignition off Then pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you and hold it there while you perform the next step 2 Tur the key to RUN and LOCK twice Then with the key in LOCK release the turn signal multifunction lever Once you do this you will hear the lock switch lock and unlock the horn will chirp twice and a 30 second program timer will begin 3 You are now ready to program the automatic door locks Select one of the three programming options listed above and press the lock side of the power door lock switch to cycle through the lock options You will have 30 seconds to begin programming If you exceed the 30 second limit the locks will automatically lock and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have left the program mode If this occurs repeat the procedure begin
270. owledge this message and clear it from the DIC display 2 96 RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR If the passenger s side rear door is not fully closed this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime Stop and turn off the vehicle check the door for obstacles and close the door again Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display RFA BATTERY LOW If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low this message will appear on the DIC The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter Pressing the select button will acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle 3 2 Comfort Controls 3 20 AM FM Stereo with 6 Disc Compact Disc 3 6 Air Conditioning Player with Programmable Equalization and 3 6 Heating Radio Data System RDS If Equipped 3 6 Defogging and Defrosting 3 34 Theft Deterrent Feature 3 7 Rear Window Defogger 3 34 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 3 8 Ventilation System 3 35 Understanding Radio Reception 3 10 Audio Systems 3 35 Tips About Your Audio System 3 10 Setting the Clock 3 36 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player 3 11 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and 3 37 Care of Your Co
271. park on a hill see Towing a Trailer in the Index That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving 2 25 Shifting Into PARK P 1 Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into PARK P like this Press and hold in the It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if bution a thedever the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle won t move even when you re on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you re pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer in the Index Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the key your vehicle is in PARK P 2 26 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Don t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to If you have to leave your vehicle with the e
272. pecially since you re on an unpaved surface When you re driving off road bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position This could cause you to lose control and crash So whether you re driving on or off the road you and your passengers should wear Safety belts Scanning the Terrain Off road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features Here are some things to consider Surface Conditions Off roading can take you over hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow or ice Each of these surfaces affects the steering acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways Depending upon the kind of surface you are on you may experience slipping sliding wheel spinning delayed acceleration poor traction and longer braking distances Surface Obstacles Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous A rock log hole rut or bump can startle you if you re not prepared for them Often these obstacles are hidden by grass bushes snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself Here are some things to consider Is the path ahead clear Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead Does the travel take you uphill or downhill There s more discussion of these subjects later Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly 4 19 When you drive over
273. pressor operating when you load your vehicle and periodically as the system adjusts the vehicle to the standard ride height Load leveling will not function normally with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet Remove the inflator hose from the outlet during loading and unloading Overload Protection The air suspension system is equipped with overload protection Overload protection is designed to protect the air suspension system and it is an indicator to the driver that the vehicle is overloaded When the overload protection mode is on it will not allow damage to the air compressor However do not overload the vehicle See Loading Your Vehicle earlier in this section If the suspension remains at a low height the rear axle load has exceeded GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating When the overload protection mode is activated the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one minute without raising the vehicle depending on the amount of overload This will continue each time the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is reduced below GAWR Indicator Light The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for internal system error If the indicator light is flashing without the load leveling function or the inflator being active turn off the ignition The next day turn on the ignition and check the indicator light The vehicle can be driven with the lig
274. provide directions or guidance to anywhere you want to go In addition they can help you locate gas stations rest areas ATMs hospitals hotels stores eateries and more Concierge Services The concierge advisor can obtain tickets reservations or help with vacation trip planning and other unique items and services Ride Assist An advisor can locate transportation in the event that you are unable to drive OnStar System Limitations Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber Services Agreement OnStar Service is available in the 48 contiguous United States Alaska Hawaii and Canada available when the vehicle is within the operating range of a cellular provider subject to limitations caused by atmospheric conditions such as severe weather or topographical conditions such as mountainous terrain subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations Global positioning capabilities used to deliver OnStar service will not be available if satellite signals are obstructed OnStar will not function if the vehicle s battery is discharged or disconnected It may also be inoperative if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle electrical system components are damaged Safety and security services are provided by existing governmental emergency service providers OnStar will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate emergency service provider and request assistance but cannot promis
275. quired to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1804 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Oldsmobile has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user can communicate with Oldsmobile by dialing 1 800 833 OLDS 6537 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Oldsmobile encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance If a U S customer wishes to write to Oldsmobile the letter should be addressed to Oldsmobile s Customer Assistance Center United States Oldsmobile Custo
276. r Owner s Manual In Portfolio en Owner s Manual Without Portfolio Fl NOTE Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name and also the Check or Money name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent Order payable to Michigan Purchasers Mail completed order form to Helm Inc USA funds add 6 sales tax HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 only do not send cash U S Order Processing 6 50 For purchases outside U S A please write to the above address for quotation TT MasterCard Canadian customers add 3 00 to U S C order processing CUSTOMER S NAME ATTENTION el Discover ae Account STREET ADDRESS NO P O BOX NUMBERS Number ary Check here if your billing address EE l Expiration el go is different from your shipping CITY STATE ZIP CODE Date mo yr address shown DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO AREA CODE GM OLD ORD99 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents obligation Allow ample time for delivery are to make checks payable in U S funds CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
277. r pull the two tabs on the cover and pull it off 2 54 The air inflator kit is located in the glove compartment The kit includes a 22 foot 6 7 m hose with three nozzle adapters To use the air inflator attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of the hose if required Then attach that end of the hose to the object you wish to inflate Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator on The indicator light will remain on when the inflator is running The system has an internal clock to prevent overheating The system will allow about five minutes of running time then the compressor will stop The indicator light will then begin to flash When the indicator is off the inflator can be started again by pressing the switch If the compressor is still hot it may only run for a short time before shutting off again Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it properly Remove the inflator hose from the outlet during loading and unloading Load leveling will not function with the inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet See Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System in the Index To reinstall the cover line up the tabs at the back of the cover put it in place and latch the tabs A continuous flashing indicator light may also indicate a malfunction in the air suspension system See E
278. r with the vehicle off will also display the odometer Trip A and Trip B Press the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP B is displayed This shows the current distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles or kilometers Both odometers can be used at the same time Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing select while the desired trip odometer is displayed You can also reset the trip odometers with the reset stem on the cluster If you press and hold the reset stem for four seconds the display will show the distance traveled since the last ignition cycle Timer The DIC can be used as a stopwatch Press the select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset not including time the ignition is off Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on even if another display is being shown on the DIC The timer will record up to 99 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 99 59 59 after which the display will roll back to zero To stop the counting of time press the select button briefly while TIMER is displayed To reset the timer to zero press and hold the select button while TIMER is displayed 2 83 Fuel Information Button Use the fuel information button to scroll through the range average fuel economy instant fuel economy and the GM Oil Life System F
279. r Positions earlier in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guides squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides Slide the guide back on its storage clip located between the interior body and the seatback Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle Infants and Young Children Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by the appropriate restraint Young children should not use the vehicle s safety belts unless there is no other choice 1 35 CAUTION Continued For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 lb 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby doesn t weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it CAUTION Continued 1 36 Children who are up against or very close to any air bag when it inflate
280. r a clicking sound Make sure you fully install the cap The diagnostic system can f determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly If you get gasoline on yourself and then something installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the ignites it you could be badly burned Gasoline atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap the Index too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way NOTICE If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you Be careful not to spill gasoline Clean gasoline from If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly painted surfaces as soon as possible See Cleaning the This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp Outside of Your Vehicle in the Index to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp in the Index Filling a Portable Fuel Container Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is ins
281. r dealer See Appearance Care and Materials in the Index Your vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish NOTICE Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax
282. r decrease bass When you use this knob the radio s tone setting will switch to manual To set the midrange press and hold the AUDIO button until MID appears on the display Press the knob above the AUDIO button to extend it then turn the knob to increase or decrease bass When you use this knob the radio s tone setting will switch to manual To set the treble press and hold the AUDIO button until TREB appears on the display Press the knob above the AUDIO button to extend it then turn the knob to increase or decrease treble When you use this knob the radio s tone setting will switch to manual If a station is weak or noisy you may want to decrease the treble Pressing and holding the AUDIO button for at least two seconds will return all tone settings including balance and fade to flat AUTO EQ This button allows you to choose preset bass midrange and treble equalization settings designed for country jazz pop rock classical and talk stations The last setting will appear on the display when you first press AUTO EQ Each time you press AUTO EQ another setting will appear on the display Press AUTO EQ again after TALK appears and MANUAL will appear Tone control will return to manual operation for bass midrange and treble Also if you use bass midrange or treble the radio control will automatically return to the manual mode MANUAL will appear on the display If your vehicle has the Bose radio your audio syst
283. r is turned on unless you have a Bose equipped vehicle You may operate the rear seat audio functions even when the primary radio power is off VOL Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the right VOL knob controls the right headphone PROG With a cassette tape in the player and the radio playing press this button to play a cassette tape Press PROG to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded Press PROG again to return to the radio when a cassette tape or compact disc is playing The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening SEEK Press the SEEK button to tune to the next station and stay there The display will show your selection The sound will mute while seeking Press and hold the SEEK button to seek through your preset radio stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons The display will show your selections The SEEK button is inactive if the AM FM mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a cassette tape press the SEEK button to hear the next selection on the tape Press and hold the SEEK button to go to the other side of the tape The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use While listening to a CD press the SEEK button to hear the next selection on the CD The SEEK button is inactive if the CD mode on the front radio or the CD
284. r tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for seek to work You can skip nine selections forward or backward on the tape Choose how many selections you want to skip Press the right or left pointing arrows on the SEEK SCAN button that many times The number of selections to be skipped will appear on the display To scan press and hold the SEEK SCAN button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep and SCAN appears on the display Use scan to listen to each selection for a few seconds The tape will go to the next selection stop for a few seconds then go on to the next selection Press this button again to stop scanning AM FM Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player The tape will stop but remain in the player 3 17 TP CD With a compact disc in the player and the radio playing press this button to play a compact disc Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing Press TP CD to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening The display will show TAPE and CD icons Eject Press this button to remove the tape The radio will play Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio off Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first Cassette Tape Messages Tight Tape is displayed when the tape is tig
285. r that they were saved You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK SCAN arrows Seeking past the last saved track will return you to the first saved track To delete tracks from SONG LIST perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press SONG LIST to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired track to be deleted 4 Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two seconds When pressing SONG LIST one beep will be heard immediately After two seconds of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted After a track has been deleted the remaining tracks are moved up the list When another track is added to the song list the tracks will be added to the end of the list To delete the entire SONG LIST perform the following steps 1 Turn the disc player on 2 Press SONG LIST to turn song list on S LIST will appear on the display 3 Press and hold SONG LIST for more than four seconds A beep will be heard followed by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will be heard after four seconds S LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating that the song list has been deleted If a disc is ejected and the song list contains saved tracks from that disc those tracks are automatically deleted from the song list To end SONG LIST mode press the SONG LIST button One be
286. r write Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33171 Detroit MI 48232 5171 In Canada please call us at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French Or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 8 11 2002 OLDSMOBILE SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check money order or credit card information to Helm Incorporated address below CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2002 OLDSMOBILE SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc RETAIL SELL PRICE 120 00 TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures adjustments and specifications for the 2002 GM transmissions transaxles and transfer cases RETAIL SELL PRICE 50 00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO Helm Incorporated P O Box
287. re to read When using concentrated washer fluid the manufacturer s instructions before use If you will be follow the manufacturer s instructions for operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature adding water may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient Don t mix water with ready to use washer protection against freezing See Engine Compartment fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze Overview in the Index for reservoir location and damage your washer fluid tank and Adding Washer Fluid other parts of the washer system Also water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid Open the cap with the Fill your washer fluid tank only washer symbol on it three quarters full when it s very cold Add washer fluid until This allows for expansion if freezing the tank is full occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Don t use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 6 28 Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other reason is that fl
288. re zone indicate the normal operating range A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low oil pressure Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced OTICE Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty Change Engine Oil Light CHANGE ENG OIL United States Canada This light is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed Once the engine oil has been changed the CHANGE ENG OIL light must be reset Until it is reset the light will be displayed when the engine is on For more information on resetting the system see Oil Life System in the Index 2 77 Security Light SECURITY Canada United States This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START The light will stay on until the engine starts If the light flashes the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode If the vehicle fails to start see Passlock in the Index If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on there may be a problem with the Passlock system Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock and you should see your dealer Also see Content Theft Deterrent in the Index for additiona
289. recall see Memory Seat and Mirrors in the Index Perimeter Lighting Press the personalization button until PERIMETER LIGHTING appears in the display To select your personalization for perimeter lighting press the select button while PERIMETER LIGHTING is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices PERIMETER LIGHTING ON default PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF If you choose for perimeter lighting to be on the headlamps and back up lamps will come on for 40 seconds if it is dark enough outside when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the two options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature 2 88 Remote Lock Feedback Press the personalization button until REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your personalization for the feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select button while REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices LOCK FEEDBACK BOTH default LOCK FEEDBACK OFF LOCK FEEDBACK HORN LOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS If you choose both the parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you p
290. rectly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it 5 13 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 14 1 You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop A hiss means there is still some pressure left 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap Remove the pressure cap 3 Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL 4 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck FULL COLD mark See Engine Coolant in the Index for more 5 i Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank information about the proper coolant mixture but leave the radiator pressure cap off 6 Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fan 7 By this time the coolant level inside the radiator fill
291. ress the lock button If you choose off there will be no feedback when locking the vehicle If you choose horn the horn will chirp the second time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter If you choose lamps the parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature Remote Unlock Feedback Press the personalization button until REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display To select your personalization for the feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter press the select button while REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices UNLOCK FEEDBACK LAMPS default UNLOCK FEEDBACK BOTH UNLOCK FEEDBACK OFF UNLOCK FEEDBACK HORN If you choose lamps the parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter If you choose both the parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock button If you choose off there will be no feedback when unlocking the ve
292. rganized This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts Part A Scheduled Maintenance Services explains what to have done and how often Some of these services can be complex so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment you should let your dealer s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt have a qualified technician do the work If you want to get the service information see Service and Owner Publications in the Index Part B Owner Checks and Services tells you what should be checked and when It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition Part C Periodic Maintenance Inspections explains important inspections that your dealer s service department or another qualified service center should perform Part D Recommended Fluids and Lubricants lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained These products or their equivalents should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done Part E Maintenance Record is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on y
293. ries When the current load is too heavy add anything electrical to your vehicle see Servicing the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle in the Index circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away 6 56 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating If you ever have a problem on the road and don t have a spare fuse you can borrow one that has the same amperage Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without like the radio or cigarette lighter and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage Replace it as soon as you can Engine Compartment Fuse Block The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine compartment on the driver s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for more information on location Remove the cover by turning the fastener counterclockwise To reinstall the fuse panel cover push in and turn the fastener clockwise 6 57 Le 9 D ol D Oo Lez
294. rk don t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it s ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course yov ll find experienced and able service experts in Oldsmobile dealerships all across North America They Il be ready and willing to help if you need it Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trouble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What s the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps 4 37 Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hypnosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the r
295. rst 6 53 GM Vehicle Care Appearance Materials PART NUMBER Chrome and Wire Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and 1052929 16 oz 0 473 L Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers 12377964 16 oz 0 473 L Finish Enhancer Removes dust oe and surface contaminants pray on wipe off Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light 12377965 16 oz 0 473 L Swirl Remover Polish surface contamination 12377966 16 oz 0 473 L Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish 12378188 15 oz 0 443 L Foaming Tire Cleans shines and protects in one easy step Shine Low Gloss No wiping necessary Medium foaming shampoo Cleans and lightly waxes 12378401 16 oz 0 473 L Wash Wax Concentrate Biodegradable and phosphate free Quickly and easily removes spots and stains from 12378488 8 oz 0 237 L Spot Lifter carpets vinyl and cloth upholstery See your General Motors parts Department for these products See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index 6 54 Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX2M072675 ENGINE 20024 T ASSEMBLY CODE MODEL YEAR PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver s side You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine
296. s The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete your lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it When signaling a lane change a light will flash on the bottom of the driver s or passenger s outside rearview mirror 2 32 As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash more quickly than normal a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows don t go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers in the Index and for burned out bulbs If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for the trailer lamps a different turn signal flasher is used With this flasher installed the signal indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they are working Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3 4 of a mile
297. s RDM again to turn if off AUTO EQ Press AUTO EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc For more information on AUTO EQ see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section K SEEK SCAN gt To seek press the left arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have passed Press the right arrow to go to the next track If you press the button more than once the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc To scan one disc press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use SEEK SCAN to listen to each track of the currently selected disc for ten seconds The sound will mute while scanning SCAN will appear on the display Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning 3 29 To scan all loaded discs press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep Use DISC SCAN to listen to the first track for ten seconds for each disc loaded The sound will mute while scanning to the next track DISC SCAN will appear on the display Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning TUNE RCL P TYPE Press this control to see how long the current track has been playing To change what is normally shown on the
298. s a 15 psi 105 kPa pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for information on location Power Steering Fluid The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired See Engine Compartment Overview in the Index for reservoir location How to Check Power Steering Fluid Turn the key off let the engine compartment cool down wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag Replace the cap and completely tighten it Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The level should be at the C Cold mark If necessary add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 6 27 Windshield Washer Fluid NOTICE What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be su
299. s at a reasonable speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here s why Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there s no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you ll understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you re in a curve speed is the one factor you can control 4 11 Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and acceleration have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Assist System in the Index What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less favorable conditions you ll want to go slower If you need to redu
300. s can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer outstanding protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Q A What are the different types of add on child restraints Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 37 Newborn infants need complete support including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the r
301. s feature shuts off the dome courtesy vanity reading glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off This will keep your battery from running down If the battery run down protection shuts off the interior lamps it may be necessary to do one of the following to return to normal operation Shut off all lamps and close all doors or turn the ignition key to RUN This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and headlamps under most circumstances if they are left on If you would like to turn them back on turn the exterior lamps knob on 2 44 Mirrors Adjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position Electrochromic Day Night Rearview Mirror with Compass and OnStar Your vehicle has an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar system 4 This is the on off button There are three buttons for the OnStar system See your dealer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See OnStar System in the Index for more information about the services OnStar provides Automatic Dimming Feature When turned on an electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps behind you after dark The automatic dimming feature is turned on and off by pressing the far left button located on the lower part of the mirror f
302. s to unlock manually the doors will not be unlocked automatically If you choose for the driver s door to unlock in park the driver s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P Choose one of the four options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on automatic door locks see Programmable Automatic Door Locks in the Index Seat Position Recall If Equipped Press the personalization button until SEAT POSITION RECALL appears in the display To select your personalization for seat position recall press the select button while SEAT POSITION RECALL is displayed on the DIC Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF default SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE If you choose seat recall off the memory seat position you saved will not be recalled If you choose seat recall at key in the memory seat position you saved will be recalled when you put the key in the ignition 2 87 If you choose seat recall on remote the memory seat position you saved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter Choose one of the three options and press the personalization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature For more information on seat position
303. s you many useful new features With RDS the radio can do the following e Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to seek to stations with traffic announcements receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies and receive and display messages from radio stations 3 14 RDS features are only available on FM stations that broadcast RDS information The RDS features on your radio rely on receiving specific RDS information from these stations These features will only work when the RDS information is available In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly If this happens please contact the radio station When you are tuned to an RDS station the station name will appear on the display instead of the frequency Most RDS stations provide their station name the time of day and a Program Type PTY for their current programming P TYPE This button is used to turn on and off Program Type PTY select The PTY icon and the light next to the button will turn on The last selected PTY will appear on the display for five seconds Turn the P TYPE knob to select the PTY you want to listen to Press SEEK SCAN to find radio stations for that PTY The last PTY selected will be used to seek or scan If a station with the selected PTY is not found NONE FOUND will appear on the display If both P TYPE and TRAF are
304. safety belts to secure the restraint See Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position in the Index for information on how to secure a child restraint in your vehicle using the vehicle s safety belts With this system use the LATCH system instead of the vehicle s safety belts to secure a child restraint 1 45 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1 Find the anchors for the seating position you want to use where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 If the child restraint is forward facing attach the top strap to the top strap anchor See Top Strap in the Index Tighten the top strap according to the child restraint instructions 5 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint simply unhook the top strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the anchor points 1 46 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position You ll be using the lap shoulder belt See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 1 Put
305. speed to high Rear Window Defogger The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass Press the button to start warming your rear window A light will glow in the button while the defogger is working If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this button will activate them After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself or press the button during the heating cycle to turn it off If you need additional warming time press the button again Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window NOTICE Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp This may damage the defogger grid The repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty The lower buttons on the rear seat audio system are used to adjust the rear seat comfort controls The temperature of the air coming through the rear outlets is determined by the front passenger s temperature setting The button with the up and down arrows on it regulates the fan speed The mode button is used to change the direction of airflow upper bi level or floor to the rear seat area To turn the rear comfort controls off press the lower PWR button For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed use the panel outlet setting to direct outside air through your vehicle Air will flow through the instrument panel outle
306. suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels aren t rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal If you have the Traction Assist System remember It helps avoid only the acceleration skid If you do not have this system or if the system is off then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal 4 15 If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including engin
307. sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Warning The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 6 43 Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 6 44 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overa
308. t more than once Things like tar asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don t get them off quickly Use a clean cloth and a vinyl leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Cleaning Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth Then let the leather dry naturally Do not use heat to dry For stubborn stains use a leather cleaner See your dealer for this product Never use oils varnishes solvent based or abrasive cleaners furniture polish or shoe polish on leather Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately If dirt is allowed to work into the finish it can harm the leather Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often
309. tandard four way round pin connector an adapter connector is available from your dealer Your vehicle is also equipped with wiring for an electric trailer brake controller These wires are located inside the vehicle on the driver s side under the instrument panel These wires should be connected to an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or a qualified service center Section 5 Problems on the Road Here you ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road 5 2 Hazard Warning Flashers 5 11 5 2 Other Warning Devices 5 17 5 3 Jump Starting 5 18 5 8 Towing Your Vehicle 5 18 5 9 Engine Overheating 5 32 Cooling System Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If You re Stuck In Sand Mud Ice or Snow 5 1 Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others They also let police know you have a problem Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off The button for the hazard warning flashers is located on top of the steering column The hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in and even if the key isn t in Press the button all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off To turn off the flashers press the button again When the hazard warning flashers are on the turn signals won t work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set one
310. ted States Canada NOTICE Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance environment The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission CHECK ENGINE light comes on and a chime will controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE sound to indicate that there is a problem and service is SOON or CHECK ENGINE light to come on required Malfunctions often will be indicated by the Modifications to these systems could lead to system before any problem is apparent This may costly repairs not covered by your warranty prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This may also result in a failure to pass a This system is also designed to assist your service required Emission Inspection Maintenance test technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction 2 73 This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light doesn t come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a malfunction
311. ted on the air cleaner in the engine compartment that lets you know when the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed Check indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is changed whichever occurs first See Air Cleaner in the Index for more information Inspect your air cleaner filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is used in dusty areas or under off road conditions Weatherstrip Lubrication Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather more frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Automatic Transmission Check Check the transmission fluid level add if needed See Automatic Transmission Fluid in the Index A fluid loss may indicate a problem Check the system and repair if needed At Least Once a Year Key Lock Cylinders Service Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D Body Lubrication Service Lubricate all hood latch assembly secondary latch pivots spring anchor release pawl rear compartment hinges outer liftgate handle pivot points rear door detent link roller mechanism liftgate handle pivot points latch bolt fuel door hinge cargo door hinge locks and folding seat hardware Part D tells you what to use More frequent lubrication may be required when
312. th buttons Accessories Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit If you would like additional information please contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com 2 63 The Instrument Panel Your Information System 2 64 The main components of your instrument panel are the following A Exterior Lamp Controls I Comfort Controls B Air Vents J Hood Release C Turn Signal Multifunction Lever K Driver Information Center DIC Steering D Comfort Control Steering Wheel Controls Wheel Controls E Instrument Panel Cluster Le Rear Wiridow Washer Wiper F Audio Steering Wheel Controls M Lighter G Ignition Switch N Accessory Power Outlet H Audio System O Rear Window Defogger P Glove Box 2 65 Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You ll know how fast you re going about how much fuel you ve used and many other things you II need to know to drive safely and economically SERVICE SECURITY ENGINE sool SERVICE CHANGE REDUCED AWD ENG ENGINE OIL POWER United States version shown Canada similar 2 66 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in miles The
313. the delay time The closer to the top of the lever the shorter the delay For steady wiping at low speed turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings For high speed wiping turn the band further to the second solid band past the delay settings To stop the wipers move the band to off Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they re frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them If your blades do become worn or damaged get new blades or blade inserts 2 34 Rainsense Wipers If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with Rainsense windshield wipers When active these wipers are able to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically turn on the wipers The moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield To turn on the Rainsense feature the wipers must be set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction lever Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity of the rainsensor For more wipes select the higher settings for fewer wipes select the lower settings located closer to off on the multifunction lever The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from off to high speed according to the weather conditions The wipers can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining NOTICE Turn the multifunction lever to off to avoid wiper damage when
314. the restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or neck put it behind the child restraint 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1 47 1 48 5 To tighten the belt feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint If you re using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Center Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Don t use child restraints in this position The restraints Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag Never won t work properly put a rear facing child restraint in this seat Here s why A child in a rear
315. things to do to summon help and keep You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers Tie ared cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle If you have no blankets or extra clothing make This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags to get inside CO could overcome you and kill floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself you You can t see it or smell it so you might not or tuck under your clothing to keep warm know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn t collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that s away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while 4 43 Then shut the engine off and c
316. tions Engine Specifications Engine Description VORTEC 4200 WY PO seg he Si ee SERRA SENG SE Se OSE L6 VIN COJE eeose fanime candi arya pad oes S Firing Order socre cecrovecipeee crys 1 5 3 6 2 4 Spark Plug Gap 0 050 inches 1 25 mm Wheel and Tires Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 N m Capacities Cooling System 13 9 quarts 13 1 L Crankcase 0 0000 cee 7 0 quarts 6 6 L Transmission Drain and Refill 5 0 quarts 4 7 L Differential Fluid REAM ec a cence eg lg ak eee ee de 4 0 pints 1 9 L PRONG eegee psies pn tE ere Reread 2 6 pints 0 8 L Fuel Tank 18 7 U S gallons 75 7 L All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the appropriate level as recommended in this manual Recheck the fluid level after filling See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index for more information Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Engine Oil Filter 0 00 PF59 Engine Air Cleaner Filter A2014C Automatic Transmission Filter Kit nananana GM Part No 24200796 Spark Plugs 0 00 0000 41 965 Fuel Filter ee a a me a GF83 1 Windshield Wiper Blade 20 0 inches 50 8 cm Backglass Wiper Blade 14 0 inches 35 6 cm ACDelco part number 6 63 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle Your vehicle
317. transmission to THIRD 3 or a lower gear under heavy loads or hilly conditions When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in PARK P for a few minutes before turning the engine off If you do get the overheat warning see Engine Overheating in the Index Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle with a trailer attached on a hill If something goes wrong your rig could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill here s how to do it 1 Apply your regular brakes but don t shift into PARK P yet Then turn your wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift into PARK P 5 Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL N 6 Release the regular brakes Wh
318. ts Your vehicle s flow through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it s moving When the vehicle is not moving you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any air delivery mode and any fan speed Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle Move the control in the center of each outlet side to side to direct the air from the outlet Use the thumbwheel under the outlet to close the louvers For the most efficient airflow and temperature control keep the louvers in the fully opened position The rear seat outlets can be used to adjust the airflow toward either seating area the floor or upward Move the control in the center of each outlet side to side to direct airflow Ventilation Tips Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice snow or any other obstruction such as leaves The heater and defroster will work better reducing the chance of fogging your windows Incool damp weather minimize your use of recirculation to reduce the chance of fogging your windows Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle Comfort Control Steering Wheel Controls You can adjust certain comfort control functions using the controls on your steering wheel Fan Press the up arrow to increase the fan speed and the down arrow to decrease the fan speed
319. tself as well Be sure the underbody mounted spare or flat road tire is stored with its valve stem pointing up 5 29 NOTICE An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist However storing it that way for an extended period could damage the appearance of the wheel To avoid this always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem pointing up and have the tire repaired as soon as possible 5 30 Follow this diagram to store the underbody mounted spare A Wheel Wrench Hoist Shaft Extension Retainer moapw Spare or Flat Tire Valve Stem Pointed Up 1 Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed up and to the rear 2 Pull the retainer through the wheel 3 Put the socket end of the extension on an angle through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft 4 Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened Return the jack wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper location under the rear seat of the vehicle Secure the items and return the rear seat to its proper position PUSH amp PULL EC A Handle C Extension Wonn rew B Wheel Wrench D Wheel Blocks and Jack 5 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push
320. ual Many people read their owner s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle If you do this it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle In this manual you ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly vii Safety Warnings and Symbols You will find a number of safety cautions in this book We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people In the caution area we tell you what the hazard is Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard Please read these cautions If you don t you or others could be hurt Viii You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book This safety symbol means Don t Don t do this or Don t let this happen Vehicle Damage Warnings Also in this book you will find these notices NOTICE These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle In the notice area we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by your warranty and it could be costly But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage When you read other manuals you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words You ll also see warni
321. uel Range Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears to display the remaining distance you can drive without refueling It s based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated Fuel range cannot be reset 2 84 Average Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until AVG appears in the display Average fuel economy is how many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions Press and hold the select button while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel economy Average fuel economy will then be calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it will be continually updated each time you drive Instant Fuel Economy Press the fuel information button until INST appears in the display Instant fuel economy is how many miles per gallon your vehicle is at the particular moment in time The instant fuel economy cannot be reset GM Oil Life System Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears in the display The GM Oil Life System shows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life It will show 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
322. uid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won t work well or won t work at all So it isn t a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid won t correct a leak If you add fluid when your linings are worn then you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system If you have too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system See Checking Brake Fluid in this section Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid See Periodic Maintenance Inspections in the Index 6 29 Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap Just look at the brake fluid reservoir The fluid level should be above MIN If it isn t have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak After work is done on the brake hydraulic system make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark 6 30 What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in the Index Use new brake
323. up your foot and do it That s reaction time Average reaction time is about 3 4 of a second But that s only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in 3 4 of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it s pavement or gravel the condition of the road wet dry icy tire tread the condition of your brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your engine ever stops while you re driving brake normally but don t pump your brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If your engine stops you w
324. up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed MODE Button Press this button to manually select the air delivery mode to the floor panel or windshield outlets The system will stay in the selected mode until the MODE button is pressed again or the AUTO button is pressed Display In full AUTO mode the automatic climate control system display will show the outside temperature labeled EXT for external temperature and AUTO If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery mode the display will change to also show you the current system mode If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch the display will change to show the selected fan speed After five seconds the display will change to show the EXT temperature and the selected manual setting Automatic Operation Press the AUTO button to set the system to automatically control the air delivery mode fan speed air temperature and recirculation operations Whenever you press AUTO the display will change to show the current driver s set temperature automatic air delivery mode and fan speed Press the AUTO button again within five seconds and the display will show the passenger s set temperature After five seconds the display will change to the EXT external temperature outside the vehicle When AUTO is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor will run
325. upply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You ll have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful What s the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all You can get wet ice when it s about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution If you have traction assist keep the system on It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road But you can turn the traction system off if you ever need to You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle in the Index Even though
326. ush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Don t let it happen to you If it does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then here are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 38 Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you drive regularly in steep country or if you re planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable See Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads in the Index for information about driving off road Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transmission These parts can work hard on mountain roads Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill If you don t shift down your brakes could get so
327. wo personalized exit positions can be set by first recalling the driver s position by pressing 1 or 2 then positioning the seat in the desired exit position for that driver Then press and hold the button with the exit symbol for three seconds A chime will sound to let you know that the position has been stored With the vehicle in PARK P the exit position for that driver can be recalled by pressing the exit button The mirrors power lumbar and recline positions will not be stored or recalled for the exit positions Programming for automatic seat and mirror movement can be done through the Driver Information Center DIC You can choose to either select or not select automatic seat and mirror movement by using the remote keyless entry transmitter by placing your key in the ignition or when exiting the vehicle For programming information see Vehicle Programming and Personalization Features in the Index 1 4 Heated Front Seats Option Your vehicle may have heated front seats The buttons used to control this feature are located on the front door armrests The engine must be running for the heated seat feature to work The horizontal button with the heated seat symbol is used to control the temperature settings high medium and low Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings and to turn the heated seat off An indicator light will glow beside the temperature selected The low setting warms th
328. ximum weights for the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle If you do have a heavy load you should spread it out Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads Please note your vehicle s Certification Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or either the maximum front or rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your vehicle s weight ratings Ask your dealer to help you load you vehicle the right way NOTICE Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading 4 45 If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there s a crash they ll keep going Things you put inside your vehicle can str
329. xposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion 4 21 Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill you need to take some special steps Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed Don t use more power than you need because you don t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible If the path twists and turns you might want to find another route Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous You could lose traction slide sideways and possibly roll over You could be seriously injured or killed When driving up hills always try to go straight up 4 22 Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you re there Use your headlamps even during the day They make you more visible to oncoming traffic Driving to the top crest of a hill at full speed can cause an accident There could be a drop off embankment cliff or even another vehicle You could be seriously injured or killed As you near the top of a hill slow down and stay alert Q What should I do if my vehicle stalls or is about to stall and I can t make it up the
330. y also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel Canadian Vehicles For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program Please consult your dealer for details General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet th
331. y hills are simply too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you will stall If you drive down them you can t control your speed If you drive across them you will roll over You could be seriously injured or killed If you have any doubt about the steepness don t drive the hill Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill you need to decide if it s one of those hills that s just too steep to climb descend or cross Steepness can be hard to judge On a very small hill for example there may be a smooth constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top On a large hill the incline may get steeper as you near the top but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes grass or shrubs Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill Is there a constant incline or does the hill get sharply steeper in places Is there good traction on the hillside or will the surface cause tire slipping Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won t have to make turning maneuvers Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path boulders trees logs or ruts What s beyond the hill Is there a cliff an embankment a drop off a fence Get out and walk the hill if you don t know It s the smart way to find out Is the hill simply too rough Steep hills often have ruts gullies troughs and e
332. you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow If you ll be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 4 000 Ibs 1 816 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle See Carbon Monoxide in the Index Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground 4 51 Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1 500 Ibs 680 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
333. you To use automatic volume press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL ON appears on the display To turn automatic volume off press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL OFF appears on the display Finding a Station AM FM Press this button to switch between AM FM1 and FM2 The display shows your selection TUNE RCL P TYPE Turn this control to select radio stations K SEEK SCAN To seek press the right or left arrow briefly to go to the next or previous station and stay there The sound will mute while seeking To scan press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for two seconds until SC appears on the display and you hear a beep Use scan to listen to stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a station stop for a few seconds then go on to the next station Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning If you press SEEK SCAN for more than four seconds the radio will change to preset scan mode The sound will mute while scanning To scan your preset pushbuttons press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow for more than four seconds PRESET SCAN will appear on the display You will hear a double beep and the P will blink with the preset number Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds The radio will go to a preset station stored on your pushbuttons stop for a few seconds then go on to the next preset station Press either SEEK SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets 3 21 Setting Preset Stati

Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents